Mitsubishi Electric FX3G SERIES Скачать руководство пользователя страница 755

Страница: 755 / 948

753

/FX

3UC

Series Programmable Controllers

Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305

34.6 FNC 305 – FLSTRD / FX3U-CF-ADP status read

FNC276

-F

NC2
79

Trans
fer 3

FNC28

0-F

NC
289

igh-Speed

Process

ing 2

FNC2

90-
FNC299

tensi

on Fi
le

C300-

FNC30

-C

F-

SFC

•STL

Programming

Interrupt

Function

l D

evi

rror Code

rsi

on U

Inform

ati

ecuti

imes

34.6.1 Detailed explanation of setting data

Details on the setting data in the FLSTRD instruction are as shown below.

• When

is "K0" to "K63"

The FLSTRD instruction reads the final line position and final column position of each file.

• When

is "K256 (H100)"

The FLSTRD instruction reads file IDs stored in the CompactFlash

card. For a file ID corresponding to the read

data, refer to the file ID correspondence table shown below.
When a file exists, a bit corresponding to the file ID turns ON.

File ID correspondence table

• When

is "K512 (H200)"

The FLSTRD instruction reads the data capacity, used space and free space of the CompactFlash

card to the

following devices respectively.

Setting items

Description

Data Type

Contents of status to be read
K0 to K63 : Final line position of each file
K256(H100) : File IDs stored in the CompactFlash

card

K512(H200) : Capacity of the CompactFlash

card

K768(H300) : Version of the CF-ADP
K1024(H400) : Error information (error flag)
K1280(H500) : Error codes

16-bit binary

Head device to which the read status is written

The number of data points stored in

varies depending on the contents of the read

status.

16-bit binary

Channel number used by the CF-ADP
K1 : ch1
K2 : ch2

16-bit binary

Setting items

Description

Final line position
K1 to the specified maximum line position

Final column position

Setting items

Description

Stores the existence of file IDs.

Setting items

b15

b14

b13

b12

b11

b10

Setting items

Description

+1,

Data capacity of the CompactFlash

card

(kB) Units, If the data capacity is less than 1 kB, "1" is stored.

+3,

Used space of the CompactFlash

card

(kB) Units, If the data size is less than 1 kB, "1" is stored.

+5,

Free space of the CompactFlash

card

(kB) Units, If the data size is less than 1 kB, "1" is stored.

Содержание FX3G SERIES

Страница 1: ...FX3G FX3U FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS PROGRAMMING MANUAL Basic Applied Instructions Edition ...

Страница 2: ......

Страница 3: ...ntroller It should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Manual No JY997D16601 Revision J Date 7 2011 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any...

Страница 4: ...in purposes related to human life Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or fails...

Страница 5: ...ched battery or EEPROM backed devices power ON OFF and RUN STOP 36 2 6 3 Types of backup methods against power failure 40 2 6 4 Change between general devices and latched battery backed devices 41 2 6 5 How to initialize devices battery backed 41 2 7 Types and Setting of Parameters 42 2 7 1 Parameter list 42 2 7 2 Parameter initial values and available tools for changing parameter values 44 2 7 3 ...

Страница 6: ...se 115 4 8 High Speed Counter C FX3G PLCs 117 4 8 1 Types and device numbers of high speed counters 117 4 8 2 Input assignment for high speed counters 119 4 8 3 Handling of high speed counters 120 4 8 4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value 120 4 8 5 Related devices 120 4 8 6 Assignment of counter input terminal and switching of function 121 4 8 7 Response frequency of high s...

Страница 7: ...o Understand before Programming 163 6 1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions 163 6 2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs 166 6 2 1 Programming procedure and execution order 166 6 2 2 Double output double coil operation and countermeasures 167 6 2 3 Circuits which cannot be programmed and countermeasures 168 6 3 I O Processing and Response Delay 169 6 4 Mutual Relationship Among Program...

Страница 8: ...Move 255 9 6 1 Function of transfer between file registers and data registers 257 9 7 FNC 16 FMOV Fill Move 259 9 8 FNC 17 XCH Exchange 261 9 9 FNC 18 BCD Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal 263 9 10 FNC 19 BIN Conversion to Binary 266 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation FNC 20 to FNC 29 269 10 1 FNC 20 ADD Addition 270 10 2 FNC 21 SUB Subtraction 273 10 3 FNC 22 MUL Multiplication 276 10 4 FNC 23 ...

Страница 9: ...uction 363 13 6 2 Table high speed comparison mode M8130 365 13 6 3 Frequency control mode HSZ and PLSY instructions M8132 368 13 7 FNC 56 SPD Speed Detection 371 13 8 FNC 57 PLSY Pulse Y Output 375 13 9 FNC 58 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 380 13 10 FNC 59 PLSR Acceleration Deceleration Setup 383 14 Handy Instruction FNC 60 to FNC 69 388 14 1 FNC 60 IST Initial State 389 14 1 1 IST instruction equiv...

Страница 10: ... 498 18 6 FNC118 EBCD Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion 503 18 7 FNC119 EBIN Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion 504 18 8 FNC120 EADD Floating Point Addition 506 18 9 FNC121 ESUB Floating Point Subtraction 507 18 10 FNC122 EMUL Floating Point Multiplication 508 18 11 FNC123 EDIV Floating Point Division 509 18 12 FNC124 EXP Floating Point Exponent 510 18 13 FNC125 LOGE F...

Страница 11: ... Decimal to Gray Code Conversion 582 22 2 FNC171 GBIN Gray Code to Decimal Conversion 583 22 3 FNC176 RD3A Read form Dedicated Analog Block 584 22 4 FNC177 WR3A Write to Dedicated Analog Block 585 23 Introduction of Alternate Instructions FNC180 586 23 1 Instruction correspondence table 586 24 Others FNC181 to FNC189 587 24 1 FNC182 COMRD Read Device Comment Data 588 24 2 FNC184 RND Random Number ...

Страница 12: ...Point Data 672 29 5 FNC260 DABIN Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion 676 29 6 FNC261 BINDA BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion 679 29 7 FNC269 SCL2 Scaling 2 Coordinate by X Y Data 682 30 External Device Communication Inverter Communication FNC270 to FNC275 686 30 1 FNC270 IVCK Inverter Status Check 687 30 2 FNC271 IVDR Inverter Drive 689 30 3 FNC272 IVRD Inverter Parameter Read 691 30 4 FNC273 IVWR Inver...

Страница 13: ...line 784 35 2 2 Explanation of function and operation 784 35 2 3 Expression of step ladder 786 35 2 4 Creation of step ladder program SFC program STL program 787 35 2 5 Preliminary knowledge for creating step ladder programs 788 35 2 6 Program with state relays in branches and recombination 791 35 2 7 Program examples 795 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function 801 36 1 Outline 801 36 2 Com...

Страница 14: ...1 2 RUN LED lit or unlit FX3G FX3U FX3UC 876 38 1 3 BATT BAT LED lit or unlit FX3U FX3UC 877 38 1 4 ALM LED lit or unlit FX3G 877 38 1 5 ERROR ERR LED lit flickering or unlit FX3G FX3U FX3UC 877 38 1 6 L RUN LED FX3UC 32MT LT 2 878 38 1 7 L ERR LED FX3UC 32MT LT 2 878 38 2 Error Code Check Method and Indication 879 38 2 1 Error code check method by display module 879 38 2 2 Error code check method...

Страница 15: ...ppendix B 5 Execution Time of Pulse Generation Instruction P in Each Applied Instruction 927 Appendix B 6 Execution Time on Combination of Applicable Devices and Indexing 929 Appendix B 6 1 Basic instruction LD LDI AND ANI OR ORI execution time 929 Appendix B 6 2 Applied instruction execution time 929 Appendix C Applied Instruction List by Instruction Type in Alphabetic Order 932 Appendix C 1 Appl...

Страница 16: ...main unit U Supplied with product FX3UC D DS DSS Series Hardware Manual JY997D28601 I O specifications wiring and installation of the PLC main unit FX3UC D DS DSS extracted from the FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition For detailed explanation refer to the FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition U Supplied with product FX3UC 32MT LT 2 Hardware Manual JY997D31601 I O specifications wirin...

Страница 17: ...d with product FX3U 232ADP MB Installation Manual JY997D26401 Handling procedures of the RS 232C communication special adapter For the MODBUS serial communication network refer to the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual MODBUS Serial Communication Edition For computer link or non protocol communication by RS and RS2 instructions refer to the FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition U Su...

Страница 18: ...er to each manual and the related data U Supplied with product FX2N 64CL M User s Manual Hardware Volume JY997D05401 Handling procedures of the CC Link LT master special function block For use refer to the FX2N 64CL M User s Manual Detailed Volume Additional Manual FX2N 64CL M User s Manual Detailed Volume JY997D08501 Details about the CC Link LT master special function block Supplied with product...

Страница 19: ...to the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied with product FX2N 4AD TC User s Guide JY992D65501 Handling procedures of the 4 channel thermocouple input special function block U Supplied with product FX3U 4LC Installation Manual JY997D38901 Handling procedures of the 4 channel temperature control special function block For use refer to the FX3U 4LC User s Manual Additi...

Страница 20: ...sitioning function built in the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series 09R620 Pulse output and positioning When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each product is connected U Supplied with product FX3U 2HSY ADP Installation Manual JY997D16401 Handling procedure of the special high speed output adapter For use refer to the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series User s...

Страница 21: ...er s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each product is connected Connector conversion U Supplied with product FX3G CNV ADP Installation Manual JY997D32301 Handling procedures of the conversion adapter for special adapter connection U Supplied with product FX3U CNV BD Installation Manual JY997D13601 Handling procedures of the connector conversion expansion board for special adap...

Страница 22: ...Manual JY997D12801 Specifications and operating procedures of the memory cassette Extension power supply unit U Supplied with product FX3U 1PSU 5V Installation Manual JY997D22501 Specifications and operating procedures of the extension power supply unit U Supplied with product FX3UC 1PS 5V Installation Manual JY997D12201 Specifications and operating procedures of the FX3UC 1PS 5V Essential manual ...

Страница 23: ...c name of special communication adapters The models shown below FX3U 232ADP MB and FX3U 485ADP MB CF card special adapter Generic name of CF card special adapters CF ADP FX3U CF ADP Special analog adapter Generic name of special analog adapters The models shown below FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP and FX3U 4AD TC ADP Connector conversion ada...

Страница 24: ...32L FX3U FLROM 16 FX3U FLROM 64 FX3U FLROM 64L and FX3U FLROM 1M Battery FX3U 32BL Peripheral equipment Peripheral equipment Generic name of programming software handy programming panels and display units Programming tools Programming tool Generic name of programming software and handy programming panels Programming software Generic name of programming software GX Works2 Abbreviation of programmin...

Страница 25: ... sequence programs 2 Example of list display 2 Circuit programming In this method ladder formats are drawn on the graphic screen 1 Features In a circuit program a sequence circuit is drawn on the graphic screen by sequence formats and device numbers Because a sequence circuit is expressed with contact symbols and coil symbols the contents of a program can be understood easily In the circuit displa...

Страница 26: ...and constants 1 Features You can create programs easily by connecting parts along the flow of data and signals and improve the programming efficiency 1 1 2 Applicability of programming languages in programming software The table below shows the applicability of programming languages in GX Works2 and GX Developer Applicability in GX Works2 and GX Developer 1 1 3 Compatibility among programs All seq...

Страница 27: ...C 54 HSZ FNC 55 and HSCT FNC 280 If the number of high speed counters is insufficient special extension equipment high speed counter blocks can be connected By extending hardware counters in the high speed counter block 3 high speed pulses at up to 200 kHz can be received except 2 and 4 edge count 3 Can only be connected to the FX3U FX3UC PLC FX3U 2HC high speed counter block 2 I O refresh functio...

Страница 28: ...one time by the input image memory before operation in the step 0 The output information is output at one time when END instruction is executed I O refresh instruction can get the latest input information and immediately output the operation result during sequence operation Related instruction Refresh REF FNC 50 2 Pulse output function for pulse train output control Related instructions Pulse Y Ou...

Страница 29: ...n Refer to the GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common for the details on symbolic information 2 2 Introduction of Applied Instructions 1 Excellent fundamental performance FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLCs are equipped with not only fundamental applied functions for data transfer data comparison arithmetic operations logical operations data rotation and data shift but also high speed processing instruction...

Страница 30: ...resh and filter adjust REFF FNC 51 Speed detection SPD FNC 56 Pulse Y output PLSY FNC 57 Pulse ramp PLSR FNC 59 Refer to Chapter 13 7 Handy instructions and instructions for external devices Initial state IST FNC 60 Teaching timer TTMR FNC 64 Alternate state ALT FNC 66 Ramp variable value RAMP FNC 67 Rotary table control ROTC FNC 68 Ten key input TKY FNC 70 Digital switch thumbwheel input DSW FNC ...

Страница 31: ...nput and Y output devices are assigned to remote I O units and operated by programs for general purpose I O Refer to the FX3UC Hardware Edition for the built in type CC Link LT master Refer to the product manual for the FX2N 64CL M 3 MELSEC I O LINK The MELSEC I O LINK is a remote I O system whose master station is an FX3U FX3UC D DS DSS PLC Units for MELSEC I O LINK remote I O system A PLCs can b...

Страница 32: ...X Input relays function as receiving ports when the PLC receives signals from external input switches The assigned device mnemonic is X The PLC has built in input relays in accordance with its size Auxiliary relay M There are many auxiliary relays inside the PLC The assigned device mnemonic is M State relay S There are many state relays inside the PLC The assigned device mnemonic is S Timer T Ther...

Страница 33: ...e The timers T192 to T199 are dedicated to subroutines and interrupt routines The timers T250 to T255 are retentive type base clock timers for 100 ms pulses This means that the present value is retained even after the timer coil drive input turns OFF And when the drive input turns ON again a retentive type timer will continue its counting from where it left off 5 Counters C The following types of ...

Страница 34: ... value of timers and counters or used in applied instructions 9 Pointers P I Refer to Section 4 12 Pointers are classified into branch pointers and interrupt pointers A branch pointer P specifies the jump destination of the conditional jump CJ FNC 00 or the call subroutine CALL FNC 01 instruction An interrupt pointer I specifies the routine of an input interrupt timer interrupt or counter interrup...

Страница 35: ...the RAM memory as standard By mounting a memory cassette the memory type can be changed 1 When using the built in memory without attached memory cassette CPU System ROM Built in program memory RAM Parameter File register D Comment Sequence program Special setting Memory cassette Flash memory Not attached Built in device memory RAM Bit device memory Data register D Timer present value register T Co...

Страница 36: ...R The PLC automatically recognizes attachment of a memory cassette when the power is turned ON and disconnects the built on program memory Priority is given to the memory cassette Built in device memory RAM Bit device memory Data memory Transfer and initialization by instructions Contact image memory Input relay X Output relay Y Auxiliary relay M State relay S Timer contact and time counting coil ...

Страница 37: ...t value register C Index register V Z Contact image memory Input relay X Output relay Y Auxiliary relay M State relay S Timer contact and time counting coil Counter contact counting coil and reset coil Extension register R Data memory Transfer and initialization by instructions Extension file register ER Not attached CPU System ROM Built in program memory EEPROM Not used EEPROM Parameter File regi...

Страница 38: ...P RUN RUN STOP Parameter Does not change 2 Sequence program Does not change 2 Comment Can be secured by parameter setting Does not change 2 File register Does not change 2 Special setting Does not change 2 Symbolic information 1 Does not change 2 Item Power OFF Power OFF ON STOP RUN RUN STOP Data register D General type Cleared Does not change Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON Latched batt...

Страница 39: ...rged in the large capacity capacitor built in the PLC When the voltage of the large capacity capacitor becomes low the clock data is not held correctly The capacitor can hold the clock data for 10 days when the ambient temperature is 25 C in the full charge state achieved by powering ON the PLC for 30 minutes or more The clock data is backed up by the battery when the optional battery is installed...

Страница 40: ...ched battery backed type auxiliary relay M Does not change Special type auxiliary relay M Cleared Set to initial val ues 1 Does not change 1 General type state relay S Cleared Does not change Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON Latched battery backed type state relay S Does not change Annunciator S Does not change Timer contact Time counting coil T For 100 ms Cleared Does not change Cleared ...

Страница 41: ...nge Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON General type auxiliary relay M Cleared 1 Does not change Cleared Does not change while M8033 is ON Latched EEPROM backed type auxiliary relay M Does not change Special type auxiliary relay M Cleared Set to initial val ues 2 Does not change 2 General type state relay S Cleared 1 Does not change Latched EEPROM backed type state relay S Does not change An...

Страница 42: ...tional battery backs up the RAM memory built in the PLC and clock data Maintenance The battery life is around 5 years when the ambient temperature is 25 C For replacement information refer to the Users Manual Hardware Edition of each PLC Cautions When the optional battery voltage becomes low the RAM memory built in the PLC and clock data is lost Item Description Latched contents 1 The flash memory...

Страница 43: ...ched memory using the special auxiliary relay M8032 or executing the ZRST instruction This subsection describes two major methods 1 M8032 latch memory all clear When M8032 is turned ON all latched type devices 1 including reset coils of timers and counters are cleared M8032 can be turned ON and OFF using the forced ON OFF operation from peripheral equipment or within the sequence program Note that...

Страница 44: ... function requires 4000 steps 8 blocks in the memory capacity 2 This parameter sets whether or not the positioning setting constants and setting table in TBL FNC152 instruction is used When this setting is used the program memory capacity is reduced because this setting requires 9000 steps 18 blocks in the memory capacity 3 This parameter sets whether or not the built in CC Link LT function is use...

Страница 45: ...er corresponds to the following settings by specifying the contents of each on the PC screen Setting of communication format D8120 D8400 and D8420 Setting of station number D8121 and D8421 Setting of timeout check D8129 D8409 and D8429 Positioning setting Constant setting This parameter sets interrupt inputs for the maximum speed bias speed creep speed zero return speed acceleration time decelerat...

Страница 46: ...ming tool Display unit FX 30P FX 10P E 1 FX 20P E 1 FX PCS WIN E 1 GOT 1000 GOT F900 Series 2 ET 940 Series 3 Memory capacity steps Program capacity 16000 4 Refer to Subsection 2 7 3 8000 2000 8000 16000 8000 Katakana character comment capacity 0 0 0 0 File register capacity 0 0 0 0 0 0 Special unit initial value setting 5 Not used Positioning setting 5 Not used Built in CC Link LT Setup 6 Not use...

Страница 47: ...ble for the ET 940 Series Item GXDeveloper Initial value Setting range Programming tool Display unit FX 30P FX 10P E 1 FX 20P E 1 FX PCS WIN E 1 GOT 1000 GOT F900 Series 1 2 ET 940 Series 1 3 Memory capacity steps Program capacity 8000 Refer to Subsection 2 7 3 8000 2000 8000 8000 8000 Katakana character comment capacity 0 0 0 0 File register capacity 0 0 0 0 0 0 Positioning setting Not used Latch...

Страница 48: ...e program capacity is 16 000 steps or less The instruction execution time is shorter in the standard mode than in the extension mode Example Time required to execute the basic instruction LD Standard mode 0 21 μs Extension mode 0 42 μs The FX3U FX3UC PLC can store symbolic information in the following capacity The FX3U FLROM 1M memory cassette has an area dedicated to the storage of symbolic infor...

Страница 49: ... 3 00 or later is applicable Model name Maximum number of steps Memory type Allowable number of times of writing Remarks FX3G EEPROM 32L 32000 EEPROM memory 10000 times Write protect switch and loader function are provided Model name Maximum number of steps Memory type Allowable number of times of writing Remarks FX3U FLROM 64 64000 Flash memory 10000 times Write protect switch is provided FX3U FL...

Страница 50: ...P or later supports the customer keyword The security provided by the entry code second entry code and customer keyword is limited and is not always perfect Registered entry code Entered entry code Change Cancel Disable Outline Permanent PLC lock The permanent PLC lock cannot be changed canceled or reset Entry code Entry code 3 3 3 The entry code can be changed canceled and reset Entry code Second...

Страница 51: ...s Peripheral equipment and access restriction When the permanent PLC lock is selected The programming tool performs the following operations in accordance with the selected registration condition Once the permanent PLC lock is set it cannot be reset To reset the permanent PLC lock or write programs again to the PLC all clear the PLC memory When the customer keyword is set The programming tool perf...

Страница 52: ... an FX3U FX3UC PLC whose version is earlier than Ver 2 61 do not use a memory cassette where the customer keyword and permanent PLC lock are set If a memory cassette where the permanent PLC lock is set is used in an FX3U FX3UC PLC whose version is earlier than Ver 2 61 the PLC does not function normally If the PLC memory is cleared or the keyword is canceled in an FX3U FX3UC PLC whose version is e...

Страница 53: ...Input current keyword dialog box 2 Input the keyword 2nd keyword or customer keyword currently registered in the PLC 1 The second entry can be set in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later 2 The customer keyword can be set in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 61 or later 3 Click Execution button to verify the keywords you have input with the keywords currently registered in the ...

Страница 54: ...ocedure in FX 10P E FX 20P E FX 30P and FX PCS WIN E refer to the manual of each product 1 Select Online Keyword setup Disable to open Keyword Disable dialog box 2 Input the keyword 2nd keyword or customer keyword currently registered in the PLC 1 The second entry can be set in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later 2 The customer keyword can be set in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U FX3UC PLC...

Страница 55: ...positioning setting available in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later a table and constants for added TBL FNC152 instruction can be set Make sure to set this parameter when using TBL FNC152 instruction The positioning setting for TBL FNC152 instruction uses 9000 steps 18 blocks in the memory capacity For details on TBL FNC152 instruction refer to the Positioning Control Manual 2 7 8...

Страница 56: ...ents of setting Setting range Memory capacity Set the program memory capacity Initial value 16000 1 Refer to Subsection 2 7 3 Comments capacity Set the capacity of comments to be stored in the PLC Initial value 0 50 device comments block 500 steps File register capacity Set the file register capacity Initial value 0 500 file registers block 500 steps Program capacity The number of steps available ...

Страница 57: ...attery backed auxiliary relay range Initial value 500 to 1023 0 to 1023 State Set the latched battery backed state relay range Initial value 500 to 999 0 to 999 Timer The setting displayed here cannot be changed Counter 16bit Set the latched battery backed 16 bit counter range Initial value 100 to 199 0 to 199 Counter 32bit Set the latched battery backed 32 bit counter range Initial value 220 to 2...

Страница 58: ... system configuration those inputs and outputs are checked in programming by GX Developer FX3U FX3UC 0 to 377 FX3G 0 to 177 Output relay FX3U FX3UC 0 to 377 FX3G 0 to 177 Special Unit 1 It is necessary to set the memory capacity Unit No This is the unit number of each special function block unit Unit Name Set the name of each special function block unit whose initial values are to be set 32 half w...

Страница 59: ...gnment tab are displayed 32 half width characters or 16 full width char acters No This column indicates the order of initial value setting in the selected unit number Numbers 1 to 98 can be set Address Set the buffer memory address BFM number in a decimal value whose initial value is to be set 1 Comment This column is displayed when device comments are registered On the above screen Input mode of ...

Страница 60: ...transmission rates 2 5Mbps 625kbps 156kbps Point Mode Select one of the following supported point modes 16 point mode 4 point mode No This item indicates the station number of the built in CC Link LT module Station numbers 1 to 64 are available Station type Select one of the following station type Remote I O station Input Remote I O station Output Remote I O station Input Output Remote device stat...

Страница 61: ...1 Introduction 2 Overview 3 Instruction List 4 Devices in Detail 5 Specified the Device Constant 6 Before Programming 7 Basic Instruction 8 FNC00 FNC09 Program Flow 9 FNC10 FNC19 Move Compare 10 FNC20 FNC29 Arith Logic Operation 6 Setting the PLC system 1 Click on the PLC system 1 tab to setup Battery less mode MODEM initialized and RUN terminal input 1 FX3U FX3UC PLC ...

Страница 62: ...et item Contents of setting Setting range Battery less mode 1 Select this to operate the PLC without using the battery When a check mark is put here the battery error indicator lamp is automatically turned off and devices in the latched battery backed area are automatically cleared Battery mode 2 Select this item to operate the PLC with the battery MODEM initialized Set this item to automatically ...

Страница 63: ...l port do not put a check mark next to Operate communication setting Set item Contents of setting Setting range Channel selection Select a channel in which a serial port is set CH1 CH2 Operate communication setting Check mark this box when using the selected serial port in computer link non protocol communication or inverter communication Do not put a check mark when transferring and monitoring se...

Страница 64: ...positioning setting function is available in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later 1 Click Positioning tab Positioning tab is displayed when a check mark is put next to Positioning in the Memory capacity tab 2 Set the positioning constants in TBL FNC152 instruction For TBL FNC152 instruction refer to the Positioning Control Manual This example shows a window in an FX3U FX3UC PLC ...

Страница 65: ...r each set of output pulses Initial value 100 000 1 Creep speed Hz Set the creep speed in DSZR FNC150 instruction for each set of output pulses Initial value 1000 10 to 32767 2 Zero return speed Hz Set the zero point return speed in DSZR FNC150 instruction for each set of output pulses Initial value 50000 1 Acceleration time ms Set the acceleration time for each set of output pulses Initial value ...

Страница 66: ...ng from the head device number set here regardless of the number of axes Initial setting R0 Refer to the Positioning Control Manual FX3U FX3UC D0 to D6400 R0 to R31168 FX3G D0 to D6400 R0 to R22800 No This column shows the table number Numbers 1 to 100 can be set Positioning Instruction Select the positioning type among the following DDVIT Interrupt positioning instruction 3 DPLSV Variable speed o...

Страница 67: ...n setting is changed in step 7 PLC system 2 cycle the PLC power Caution After changing the memory capacity setting make sure to write both the programs and parameters to the PLC If only the parameters are written to the PLC program errors such as parameter error circuit error and grammar error may occur in the PLC Positioning table settings will not be initialized when the PLC is powered on A chec...

Страница 68: ...P Load Pulse Initial logical operation of Rising edge pulse X Y M S D b T C Section 7 5 LDF Load Falling Pulse Initial logical operation of Falling trailing edge pulse X Y M S D b T C Section 7 5 AND AND Serial connection of NO normally open contacts X Y M S D b T C Section 7 3 ANI AND Inverse Serial connection of NC normally closed contacts X Y M S D b T C Section 7 3 ANDP AND Pulse Serial connec...

Страница 69: ... PLC operations Section 7 10 MEP MEP Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse Section 7 11 MEF MEF Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse Section 7 11 Out Instruction OUT OUT Final logical operation type coil drive Y M S D b T C Section 7 2 SET SET SET Bit device latch ON Y M S D b Section 7 13 RST Reset RESET Bit device OFF Y M S D b T C D R V Z Section 7 13 PLS Pulse R...

Страница 70: ... FX3U FX3UC Series Ver 2 70 or later 4 The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver 2 20 or later 9 The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver 1 40 or later 5 The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver 2 20 or later FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function FX 3U FX 3UC FX 3G Applicable PLC Reference FX 1S FX 1N FX 2N FX 1NC FX 2NC Program Flow 00 CJ Conditional Jump 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Sect...

Страница 71: ... 10 4 24 INC Increment 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 10 5 25 DEC Decrement 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 10 6 26 WAND Logical Word AND 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 10 7 27 WOR Logical Word OR 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 10 8 28 WXOR Logical Exclusive OR 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 10 9 29 NEG Negation 3 3 3 3 Section 10 10 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 6 The instruction is provid...

Страница 72: ...tion 12 5 45 MEAN Mean 3 3 3 3 3 Section 12 6 46 ANS Timed Annunciator Set 3 3 3 3 3 Section 12 7 47 ANR Annunciator Reset 3 3 3 3 3 Section 12 8 48 SQR Square Root 3 3 3 3 Section 12 9 49 FLT Conversion to Floating Point 3 3 6 3 3 Section 12 10 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 6 The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver 1 10 or later 2 The function...

Страница 73: ... 3 3 Section 14 3 63 INCD Incremental Drum Sequencer 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 14 4 64 TTMR Teaching Timer 3 3 3 3 Section 14 5 65 STMR Special Timer 3 3 3 3 Section 14 6 66 ALT Alternate State 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 14 7 67 RAMP Ramp Variable Value 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 14 8 68 ROTC Rotary Table Control 3 3 3 3 Section 14 9 69 SORT SORT Tabulated Data 3 3 3 3 Section 14 10 1 The instruction is p...

Страница 74: ...ection 16 4 84 CCD Check Code 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 16 5 85 VRRD Volume Read 8 8 6 3 3 3 Section 16 6 86 VRSC Volume Scale 8 8 6 3 3 3 Section 16 7 87 RS2 Serial Communication 2 3 3 3 Section 16 8 88 PID PID Control Loop 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 16 9 89 to 99 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 6 The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver 1 10 or later...

Страница 75: ...Floating Point Subtraction 3 3 6 3 3 Section 18 9 122 EMUL Floating Point Multiplication 3 3 6 3 3 Section 18 10 123 EDIV Floating Point Division 3 3 6 3 3 Section 18 11 124 EXP Floating Point Exponent 3 3 Section 18 12 125 LOGE Floating Point Natural Logarithm 3 3 Section 18 13 126 LOG10 Floating Point Common Logarithm 3 3 Section 18 14 127 ESQR Floating Point Square Root 3 3 6 3 3 Section 18 15 ...

Страница 76: ...ction 19 3 143 UNI 4 bit Linking of Word Data 3 5 Section 19 4 144 DIS 4 bit Grouping of Word Data 3 5 Section 19 5 145 146 147 SWAP Byte Swap 3 3 3 3 Section 19 6 148 149 SORT2 Sort Tabulated Data 2 3 5 Section 19 7 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 6 The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver 1 10 or later 2 The function is changed in the FX3UC Seri...

Страница 77: ... 163 TSUB RTC Data Subtraction 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 21 4 164 HTOS Hour to Second Conversion 3 3 Section 21 5 165 STOH Second to Hour Conversion 3 3 Section 21 6 166 TRD Read RTC data 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 21 7 167 TWR Set RTC data 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 21 8 168 169 HOUR Hour Meter 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 Section 21 9 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 6 The ins...

Страница 78: ... 4 Section 24 5 Block Data Operation 190 191 192 BK Block Data Addition 3 5 Section 25 1 193 BK Block Data Subtraction 3 5 Section 25 2 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 6 The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver 1 10 or later 2 The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver 1 30 or later 7 The instruction is provided in the FX3U FX3UC Series Ver 2...

Страница 79: ... 26 7 207 MIDW Random Replacement of Character Strings 3 3 Section 26 8 208 INSTR Character string search 3 5 Section 26 9 209 MOV Character String Transfer 3 3 Section 26 10 Data Operation 3 210 FDEL Deleting Data from Tables 3 5 Section 27 1 211 FINS Inserting Data to Tables 3 5 Section 27 2 212 POP Shift Last Data Read FILO Control 3 3 Section 27 3 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2N...

Страница 80: ...8 2 237 AND AND Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 28 2 238 AND AND Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Section 28 2 239 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 6 The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver 1 10 or later 2 The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver 1 30 or later 7 The instruction is provided in the FX3U FX3UC Series Ver 2 61 or later 3 The instruction...

Страница 81: ... 3 3 Section 29 4 260 DABIN Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion 3 5 Section 29 5 261 BINDA BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion 3 5 Section 29 6 262 to 268 269 SCL2 Scaling 2 Coordinate by X Y Data 3 3 Section 29 7 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 6 The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver 1 10 or later 2 The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver 1 30...

Страница 82: ...3 Section 33 3 293 LOGR Logging R and ER 3 3 Section 33 4 294 RWER Rewrite to ER 3 3 3 Section 33 5 295 INITER Initialize ER 3 3 Section 33 6 296 to 299 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 6 The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver 1 10 or later 2 The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver 1 30 or later 7 The instruction is provided in the FX3U F...

Страница 83: ...LSTRD FX3U CF ADP status read 7 7 Section 34 6 1 The instruction is provided in the FX2N FX2NC Series Ver 3 00 or later 6 The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver 1 10 or later 2 The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver 1 30 or later 7 The instruction is provided in the FX3U FX3UC Series Ver 2 61 or later 3 The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver 1 30 or later 8 The in...

Страница 84: ...ints Chapter 37 State relay Initial state general type variable S0 to S9 10 points The setting can be changed between the latched battery backed type and the non latched type using parameters Section 4 4 General type variable S10 to S499 490 points Latched battery backed type variable S500 to S899 400 points Annunciator latched battery backed type variable S900 to S999 100 points Latched battery b...

Страница 85: ...ched battery backed type data registers D1000 and later can be set as file registers in units of 500 points Special type 16 bits 2 D8000 to D8511 512 points Chapter 37 Index type 16 bits V0 to V7 Z0 to Z7 16 points Section 4 11 Extension register Extension file register Extension register 16 bits R0 to R32767 32768 points latched battery backed Section 4 10 Extension file register 16 bits ER0 to E...

Страница 86: ... to 3 276 7 sec Section 4 5 100 ms for subroutine or interrupt routine T192 to T199 8 points 0 1 to 3 276 7sec 10 ms T200 to T245 46 points 0 01 to 327 67 sec Retentive type for 1 ms EEPROM keep T246 to T249 4 points 0 001 to 32 767 sec Retentive type for 100 ms EEPROM keep T250 to T255 6 points 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec 1 ms T256 to T319 64 points 0 001 to 32 767 sec Counter General type up counter 16 b...

Страница 87: ...the EEPROM D1000 and later can be set as file registers in units of 500 points by the parameter setting Special type 16 bits 2 D8000 to D8511 512 points Chapter 37 Index type 16 bits V0 to V7 Z0 to Z7 16 points Section 4 11 Extension register Extension file register Extension register 16 bits 1 R0 to R23999 24000 points Section 4 10 Extension file register 16 bits EEPROM keep ER0 to ER23999 24000 ...

Страница 88: ... 8 points Y000 to Y017 16 points Y000 to Y037 32 points Y000 to Y057 48 points Y000 to Y367 248 points FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC Model name FX3UC 32MT LT 2 When extended 256 pointsin total Input X000 to X017 16 points X000 to X357 240 points Output Y000 to Y017 16 points Y000 to Y357 240 points FX3U PLC Model name FX3U 16M FX3U 32M FX3U 48M FX3U 64M FX3U 80M FX3U 128M When extended 256 pointsin total In...

Страница 89: ...sistors of output relays are connected to output terminals inside the PLC An output relay has many electronic NO contacts and NC contacts These contacts can be arbitrarily used inside the PLC Differences in operations between external output contacts output devices and internal contacts are explained on the next page The PLC receives signals from external switches through input terminals An input ...

Страница 90: ...anges in inputs are read during the input processing in the next cycle Even if an input contact changes from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON its ON OFF status is judged after the response delay approximately 10 ms caused by the input filter When the input filter is a digital type input terminal its value can be overwritten by a sequence program Program processing The PLC reads the ON OFF status of eac...

Страница 91: ...y setting the parameters 2 This area is latched battery backed It can be changed to a non latched non battery backed area by setting the parameters 3 The characteristics of latch battery backup cannot be changed in the parameters 4 These registers can be changed to the latched battery backed type by the parameter setting when the optional battery is used However the latched range cannot be set Whe...

Страница 92: ...is a latched battery backed type device it remains activated when the operation is restarted even after X000 has turned OFF due to power failure If an NC contact of X001 is opened when the operation is restarted however M600 is deactivated The figure on the left shows a circuit using the SET and RST instructions 1 Application example of latched battery backed type auxiliary relays In some cases th...

Страница 93: ...assigned in decimal 1 FX3U FX3UC PLC 2 FX3G PLCs 1 This area is not latched battery backed It can be changed to a latched battery backed area by setting the parameters 2 This area is latched battery backed It can be changed to a non latched non battery backed area by setting the parameters 3 The characteristics of latch battery backup cannot be changed in the parameters 4 These registers can be ch...

Страница 94: ...sequence programs When state relays S are not used for step ladder instructions they can be used in general sequences in the same way as auxiliary relays M as shown in the figure on the right 2 Latched battery backed type Latched battery backed type state relays store their ON OFF status even if the power is shut down while the PLC is operating so the operation can be restarted from the last point...

Страница 95: ...e way as general type state relays In the SFC programming mode in the FX PCS WIN E however S900 to S999 cannot be programmed as a processes flow in SFC diagrams M8000 RUN monitor M8049 Y000 X000 FNC 46 ANS T 0 K 10 S900 X002 FNC 46 ANS T 1 K 20 S901 X003 X004 FNC 46 ANS T 2 K100 S902 M8048 Y010 X005 FNC 47 ANRP X001 When the special auxiliary relay M8049 is driven monitoring becomes valid If the f...

Страница 96: ... the timer turns on In other words the output contact turns on 1 23 seconds after the coil is driven When the drive input X000 turns OFF or when the power is turned off the timer is reset and the output contact returns For 100 ms pulses 0 1 to 3276 7 sec For 10 ms pulses 0 01 to 327 67 sec Retentive type for 1 ms pulses 1 0 001 to 32 767 sec Retentive type for 100 ms pulses 1 0 1 to 3276 7 sec For...

Страница 97: ...255 2 When variable analog potentiometers expansion board are used The value of a variable analog potentiometer board which can be built in an FX3G FX3U FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC as an expansion board can be obtained as numeric data ranging from 0 to 255 in accordance with the scale position An obtained numeric value can be specified as the indirectly specified value for a timer to make a variable poten...

Страница 98: ...to T249 is used in a subroutine or interrupt routine note that its output contact turns on when the first coil instruction is executed after the retentive timer has reached the set value 4 5 5 Details on timer operation and timer accuracy A timer except interrupt execution type starts counting when a coil is driven and its output contact turns on when the first coil instruction is executed after t...

Страница 99: ...r and one shot timer Flicker timer In addition the timer time can be set according to the switch input time by the teaching timer instruction TTMR FNC 64 X001 T 5 Y000 T 5 K200 T5 20 sec X001 Y000 Y000 X001 X001 T 2 T 1 T 2 K10 K20 T 1 Y000 Y000 T 2 One operation cycle X001 T1 T2 T1 2 sec 1 sec 2 sec X000 FNC 65 STMR T 10 K100 M0 S m D X000 M0 M1 M3 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec M2 A value sp...

Страница 100: ...t 2 32 bit 2 Use examples in applied instructions For the full use of timers as numeric devices refer to the explanation of applied instructions later 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 b15 Sign 0 Positive number 1 Negative number 1 b0 High order Low order 16 bits Available numeric value range 16 bit 0 to 32 767 32 bit 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 ...

Страница 101: ...e protected by battery against power failure General type Latched battery backed type protected by battery against power failure C0 to C99 100 points 1 C100 to C199 100 points 2 C200 to C219 20 points 1 C220 to C234 15 points 2 16 bit up counter Counting range 0 to 32767 32 bit bi directional counter Counting range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 General type Latched EEPROM keep type General type L...

Страница 102: ... latched battery backed type counters the current value output contact operation and reset status are backed up against power failure In FX3U FX3UC PLCs latched type counters are backed up by the battery built into the PLC In FX3G PLCs latched type counters are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC For details on backup methods against power failure refer to Section 2 6 2 General type and lat...

Страница 103: ...nt value register by DMOV instruction etc the counter continues counting and the contact does not change when the next counting input is received 4 6 5 Set value specification method 1 16 bit counter 1 Specification by constant K 2 Indirect specification D 2 32 bit counter 1 Specification by constant K 2 Indirect specification D 4 6 6 Response speed of counters Counters execute counting by cyclic ...

Страница 104: ...ric value range 16 bit counter 0 to 32767 32 bit counter 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 1 The sign is valid only when a counter is handled as a substitute for data register 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 b31 Sign 0 Positive number 1 Negative number b0 High order Low order 32 bits 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 32768 65536 131 072 262 144 524...

Страница 105: ...ase 1 count 1 phase 2 count and 2 phase 2 count and input signals waveforms of high speed counters 4 Cautions on counterpart equipment connected to high speed counter inputs General purpose inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counter inputs An encoder 1 adopting the output method shown in the table below can be connected depending on the connected terminal Encoders adopting the voltage out...

Страница 106: ...gic of the external reset input refer to Subsection 4 7 6 6 The counter C253 is usually used as a hardware counter but can be used as the counter C253 OP not equipped with reset input by combining special auxiliary relays M8388 and M8392 In this case C253 OP is handled as a software counter Notation of high speed counter devices For some high speed counters in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs the assignment of...

Страница 107: ...al start input 1 Cautions on wiring should be considered for these high speed counters For the wiring refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit 2 Hardware counters are switched to software counters when a comparison set reset instruction for high speed counter DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ or DHSCT is used The counter C253 is switched to a software counter when the logic of the external reset input signal...

Страница 108: ...ly starts counting when the input X006 turns ON while X012 is ON The counting input is X000 In this example the set value is indirectly specified by the contents of data registers D1 and D0 A high speed counter can be reset using X011 in a sequence as shown in the figure but C244 immediately reset without any program when X001 is closed So a program with X011 is not necessary The counting directio...

Страница 109: ... reset by X011 in a sequence as shown in the figure but C249 is immediately reset without any program when X002 is closed So a program with X011 is not necessary The up down count operation of C246 to C250 can be checked with M8246 to M8250 ON status Down counting OFF status Up counting 3 2 phase 2 count input These counters are 32 bit binary bi directional counters and the operation of the output...

Страница 110: ... in the main program if the HCMOV instruction is used just before the comparison instruction CMP or ZCP or comparison contact instruction 1 If it is necessary to execute comparison to update an output contact with the high speed counter s changing value use comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR HSZ or HSCT 2 Using comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR HSZ or...

Страница 111: ...ounting Down counting C247 M8247 C248 M8248 C249 M8249 C250 M8250 2 phase 2 counting input C251 M8251 C252 M8252 C253 M8253 C254 M8254 C255 M8255 Device No Name Description M8388 Contact for changing function of high speed counter Changes the function of high speed counter M8389 Function switching device Switches the logic of the external reset input For details refer to Subsection 4 7 6 M8390 Swi...

Страница 112: ...en combined with the following special auxiliary relays In a program put a special auxiliary relay just before a target counter Counter No When inverting logic of external reset input signal Description C241 to C245 C247 to C250 C252 to C255 The logic of the external reset input is inverted so that the counters are reset when the input turns OFF The logic is inverted for all target counters Counte...

Страница 113: ...o C255 with 4 edge counting For the 2 phase 2 count input counters C251 to C255 the edge count is usually set to 1 By using the programs shown in the table below the edge count may be set to 4 Counter No When using 2 phase 2 count input counters with 4 edge counting Description C251 1 edge count before change 4 edge count after change C252 C253 C253 OP C254 C255 M8000 M8198 C251 K A phase B phase ...

Страница 114: ...ncy However when hardware counters are handled as software counters with the following conditions their maximum response frequency and total frequency are limited in the same way as the software counters Use M8380 to M8387 to verify that high speed counters are handled as hardware counters or software counters When DHSCS FNC 53 DHSCR FNC 54 DHSZ FNC 55 or DHSCT FNC280 instruction is used for a har...

Страница 115: ...refer to the previous page 1 When special analog adapters and FX3U FX3UC Series special function blocks units are not used 1 When an index register is added to a counter number specified by a HSCS HSCR HSZ or HSCT instruction all hardware counters are switched to software counters 2 The high speed counters C244 OP and C245 OP can count up to 10 kHz Counter type Counter No Maximum response frequenc...

Страница 116: ...n 1 When HSZ and HSCT instructions are not used When only HSCT instruction is used When only HSZ instruction is used When both HSZ and HSCT instructions are used Maximum response frequency kHz Total frequency kHz Maximum response frequency kHz Total frequency kHz Maximum response frequency kHz Total frequency kHz Maximum response frequency kHz Total frequency kHz 1 phase 1 counting input C241 C242...

Страница 117: ...nterrupt pointers I00 and I10 pulse catch contacts M8170 and M8171 and SPD instruction using X000 and or X001 cannot be used When a counting pulse is not provided none of the high speed counter output contacts will turn ON even if the PLC executes an instruction where present value set value Counting may be started or stopped for a high speed counter when the output coil OUT C is set to ON or OFF ...

Страница 118: ... When the driving contact is the continuous execution type the current value of the counter is reset to 0 and the counter reset status is cleared at each scan while X010 remains ON 2 Timing chart X010 FNC 12 DMOV K0 C235 The current value of C235 is cleared to 0 X000 Current value of C235 1 2 3 Because X010 turns ON FNC12 DMOV is executed The current value of C235 is reset to 0 X010 1 2 3 Because ...

Страница 119: ...als waveforms of high speed counters 4 Cautions on counterpart equipment connected to high speed counter inputs General purpose inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counter inputs An encoder 1 adopting the output method shown in the table below can be connected depending on the connected terminal Encoders adopting the voltage output method and absolute encoders cannot be connected to high s...

Страница 120: ...on of high speed counter devices In some high speed counters in FX3G PLCs the input terminal assignment is changed over when used together with special auxiliary relays Such high speed counter devices are classified below Note that description as OP is not available in programming Classification Counter No Data length External reset input terminal External start input terminal 1 phase 1 count inpu...

Страница 121: ...rdware Edition of the main unit U Up counting input D Down counting input A A phase input B B phase input R External reset input S External start input Restriction to overlap input numbers Inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counters input interrupt pulse catch SPD ZRN DSZR instructions and general purpose inputs When assigning functions there should be no overlap between those input termi...

Страница 122: ...uctions are processed in the operation cycle of the PLC and operation delay is generated before the comparison output result is obtained If it is necessary to execute comparison to update an output contact with the high speed counter s changing value use comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR and HSZ 2 Using comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR or HSZ The co...

Страница 123: ...ut a special auxiliary relay just before a target counter Type Counter No Monitoring device OFF ON 1 phase 2 counting input C246 M8246 Up counting Down counting C247 M8247 C248 M8248 C249 M8249 C250 M8250 2 phase 2 counting input C251 M8251 C252 M8252 C253 M8253 C254 M8254 C255 M8255 Device No Name Description M8388 Contact for changing function of high speed counter Changes the function of high s...

Страница 124: ... related to positioning DRVI instruction Y000 and DRVA instruction Y001 are used Overall frequency 200 kHz 2 axes x 40 kHz 120 kHz Example2 When HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction Y000 are used Number of pulse width pulse period measurement inputs X003 Overall frequency 200 kHz 1 axes 1 input x 40 kHz 120 kHz Counter type Response freq...

Страница 125: ...ontacts M8170 and M8171 SPD instruction using X000 and or X001 and pulse width pulse period measurement contacts M8076 and M8077 cannot be used When a counting pulse is not provided none of the high speed counter output contacts will turn ON even if the PLC executes an instruction where present value set value Counting may be started or stopped for a high speed counter when the output coil OUT C i...

Страница 126: ...en the driving contact is the continuous execution type the current value of the counter is reset to 0 and the counter reset status is cleared at each scan while X010 remains ON 2 Timing chart X010 FNC 12 DMOV K0 C235 The current value of C235 is cleared to 0 X000 Current value of C235 1 2 3 Because X010 turns ON FNC12 DMOV is executed The current value of C235 is reset to 0 X010 1 2 3 Because the...

Страница 127: ...d It can be changed to the latched battery backed area by setting parameters 2 This area is latched battery backed It can be changed to the non latched non battery backed area by setting parameters 3 The latch battery backup characteristics cannot be changed using parameters 4 Data registers D1000 and later can be used as file registers in units of 500 points by setting parameters 5 These register...

Страница 128: ...isters can store a numeric value ranging from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 In the case of 32 bit type when a data register or file register on the low order side example D0 is specified the subsequent number on the high order side example D1 is automatically occupied Either an odd or even device number can be specified for the low order side but it is recommended to specify an even device number...

Страница 129: ...e battery built into the PLC In FX3G PLCs the contents of data registers are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC When the optional battery is installed the battery backs up the contents of some general type data registers against power failure The contents of data registers are backed up by the battery built in the PLC For details on each backup method refer to Section 2 6 When using fixed ...

Страница 130: ...ing 16 bit or 32 bit numeric values data registers As in the case of data registers when 16 bit timers or counters are used as 32 bit devices two timers or two counters example C1 and C0 store 32 bit numeric data One 32 bit counter example C200 can store 32 bit numeric data T 2 D 0 C 10 D 20 A counter or timer operates while regarding the contents of a specified data register as its set value FNC ...

Страница 131: ...hanged values by the same number register update mode in BMOV FNC 15 instruction described later Difference between BMOV FNC 15 instruction and other instructions The table below shows the differences between the BMOV FNC 15 instruction and other applied instructions The data stored in data registers set as file registers are automatically copied from the file register area A to the data register ...

Страница 132: ... other Also make sure that the number of transfer points specified by n does not exceed the file register area If the number of transfer points exceeds the file register area an operation error occurs and the instruction is not executed When and are indexed the instruction is executed if the actual device number is within the file register area and if the number of transfer points is within the fi...

Страница 133: ...he figure below Cautions on reading When a file register D1000 or later is specified for the source of BMOV FNC 15 instruction and the same number file register is not specified for the destination the contents of the file register area A inside the program memory are not read 1 When a file register is specified for the source and a data register is specified for the destination Batch transfer of ...

Страница 134: ...t takes 80 ms to write data in one continuous block 500 points to the memory cassette EEPROM Note that execution of the program is paused during this period but the watchdog timer is automatically refreshed 2 Allowable number of writes to the memory Data can be written to the memory cassette up to 10 000 times and to the memory EEPROM built in FX3G PLCs up to 20 000 times When a continuous operati...

Страница 135: ...rameter setting when the optional battery is used However the latched range cannot be set 3 These registers are stored in the EEPROM built in the PLC or in the EEPROM in the memory cassette when the memory cassette is attached 4 10 2 Data storage destination and access method Because the memory for storing data is different between extension registers and extension file registers the access method...

Страница 136: ... extension registers are backed up by the battery even when the power is turned OFF or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN in FX3U FX3UC PLCs and in FX3G PLCs if extension registers are changed to the latched battery backed type and the optional battery is installed When initializing the contents of extension registers clear them using a sequence program or GX Developer 1 When clearing the...

Страница 137: ...t value of a timer or counter A counter or timer operates with regards to the contents of a specified extension register as the set value 2 Extension registers in applied instructions Operation examples using MOV FNC 12 instruction Changing the current value of a counter The current value of the counter C2 is changed to the contents of R5 Reading the current value of a counter to an extension regi...

Страница 138: ...s R to extension file registers ER 1 in 2048 point 1 sector units Use this instruction to store newly created sectors 2048 points of data to extension file registers ER 1 INITR FNC292 This instruction initializes extension registers R and extension file registers ER 1 in 2048 point 1 sector units Use this instruction to initialize extension registers R and extension file registers ER 1 before star...

Страница 139: ...M General purpose device sequence program R4096 R0 R32767 SAVER instruction sector units RWER instruction point units Available with a memory cassette mounted ER2048 ER0 ER32767 ER4096 R2048 2048 points 2048 points 2048 points R30720 ER30720 1 sector All points are written at one time 2048 points 2048 points 2048 points 16 sectors Nonvolatile memory LOADR instruction point units INITR instruction ...

Страница 140: ...evice range Sector 0 R0 ER0 to ER2047 R0 to R2047 Sector 8 R16384 ER16384 to ER18431 R16384 to R18431 Sector 1 R2048 ER2048 to ER4095 R2048 to R4095 Sector 9 R18432 ER18432 to ER20479 R18432 to R20479 Sector 2 R4096 ER4096 to ER6143 R4096 to R6143 Sector 10 R20480 ER20480 to ER22527 R20480 to R22527 Sector 3 R6144 ER6144 to ER8191 R6144 to R8191 Sector 11 R22528 ER22528 to ER24575 R22528 to R24575...

Страница 141: ...nly in FX3U FX3UC PLCs a Initializing only extension file registers in sector units Ver 1 30 or later Example When initializing ER0 to ER4095 initializing two sectors starting from ER0 b Initializing extension registers and extension file registers in sector units Example When initializing R0 to R4095 and ER0 to ER4095 initializing two sectors starting from R0 and ER0 2 When initializing extension...

Страница 142: ...n explains the operating procedures of GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later For details on GX Developer operating procedures refer to the GX Developer manual 1 Starting up GX Developer GPPW Click Start All Programs MELSOFT Application GX Developer in Microsoft Windows 2 Setting the PLC model Set the PLC Series and PLC type as shown below 1 For Ver 8 18U to 8 24A of GX Developer the PLC type is FX3UC Es...

Страница 143: ...d the Device Constant 6 Before Programming 7 Basic Instruction 8 FNC00 FNC09 Program Flow 9 FNC10 FNC19 Move Compare 10 FNC20 FNC29 Arith Logic Operation 3 Setting the data 1 Right click Device memory in the project data list to open the submenu 2 Click New on the submenu to display New dialog box 3 Click the OK button to display the dialog box for confirmation 4 Click the Yes button 1 For Ver 8 1...

Страница 144: ...Devices in Detail 4 10 Extension Register R and Extension File Register ER 5 Input a device number to be set to Device Label and click the Display button 6 Select the data type to be set in the two selection boxes to the right of the Display button 7 Input data or character string to each device accordingly ...

Страница 145: ...LC dialog box 1 For Ver 8 18U to 8 24A of GX Developer the PLC type is FX3UC 2 Put a check mark next to MAIN prepared device memory name under Device memory 3 Click the Device data tab and add Ext file register to target devices By default Ext file register is not included for reading writing To add it click the blank space on the left side of Ext file register to change it to In GX Developer Ver ...

Страница 146: ...nts 1 V 16 bits Z 16 bits V0 to V7 8 points Z0 to Z7 8 points V0 high order side Z0 low order side V1 high order side Z1 low order side V2 high order side Z2 low order side V3 high order side Z3 low order side V4 high order side Z4 low order side V5 high order side Z5 low order side V6 high order side Z6 low order side 32 bits V7 high order side Z7 low order side This is because FX PLCs handle Z a...

Страница 147: ...ed and D20V0 is executed an instruction is executed for the device number D25 D20 5 Constants can be indexed also When K30V0 is specified an instruction is executed for decimal value K35 30 5 Octal devices X Y KnX and KnY For example when Z1 K8 is specified and X0Z1 is executed an instruction is executed for the device number X10 X0 8 addition of octal value When indexing for a device whose device...

Страница 148: ...ointer for jumping to the END step when the CJ FNC 00 instruction is executed Note that a program error will occur when P63 is programmed as a label Refer to 5 Label unnecessary for the pointer P63 in Section 8 1 For branch For input interrupt input delay interrupt For timer interrupt For counter interrupt For jump to END step P0 to P62 P64 to P4095 4095 points P63 1 point I00 X000 I30 X003 I10 X0...

Страница 149: ...SZR DVIT instructions and general purpose inputs When assigning functions there should be no overlap between those input terminals For example when the input interrupt pointer I001 is used X000 is occupied As a result C235 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 and C254 input interrupt pointer I000 pulse catch contact M8170 and SPD instruction using X000 cannot be used Delay function of input interrup...

Страница 150: ... executed at an accurate cycle in the following cases When the processing time of the interrupt program is long When an instruction requiring long processing time is used in the main program Input No Interrupt cycle ms Interrupt disabling flag I6 An integer ranging from 10 to 99 is put in portion of the pointer name Ex I610 Timer interrupt at every 10 ms M8056 1 I7 M8057 1 I8 M8058 1 I001 FNC 04 E...

Страница 151: ...control requiring an interrupt routine based on the counting result from high speed counters 1 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs 2 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP Pointer No Interrupt disabling flag Pointer No Interrupt disabling flag I010 M8059 2 I040 M8059 2 I020 I050 I030 I060 Step 0 I620 Pointer for interrupt Interrupt routine Interrupt is enabled Main prog...

Страница 152: ... FEND Interrupt routine interrupt program I010 Pointer for interrupt Counter interrupt is specified Interrupt return K2 147 483 647 Enable interrupt after EI instruction and describe the main program Drive the coil of a high speed counter and specify an interrupt pointer in DHSCS FNC 53 instruction When the current value of C255 changes from 999 to 1000 or from 1001 to 1000 the interrupt routine i...

Страница 153: ...n operations in applied instructions constant H 3 Binary numbers BIN For a timer counter or data register a numeric value is specified in decimal or hexadecimal as described above But all of these numeric values are handled in binary format inside PLCs When these devices are monitored in peripheral equipment they are automatically converted into the decimal format as shown in the figure on the rig...

Страница 154: ...2 02 0000 0010 0000 0010 3 3 03 0000 0011 0000 0011 4 4 04 0000 0100 0000 0100 5 5 05 0000 0101 0000 0101 6 6 06 0000 0110 0000 0110 7 7 07 0000 0111 0000 0111 8 10 08 0000 1000 0000 1000 9 11 09 0000 1001 0000 1001 10 12 0A 0000 1010 0001 0000 11 13 0B 0000 1011 0001 0001 12 14 0C 0000 1100 0001 0010 13 15 0D 0000 1101 0001 0011 14 16 0E 0000 1110 0001 0100 15 17 0F 0000 1111 0001 0101 16 20 10 0...

Страница 155: ...E6 to E1 0 E0 1 Binary floating point real number 20 1 2 1 0 2 2 1 2 3 0 2 23 2 1 2 0 2 1 2 2127 1 625 2129 2127 1 625 22 The sign bit b31 states whether data is positive or negative but is not handled as a complement Number of significant figures The number of significant figures of binary floating point is approximately 7 when expressed in decimal The binary floating point range is as follows Le...

Страница 156: ...are used they handle scientific notation as shown below Data can be written to D0 and D1 by MOV instruction Scientific notation real number Mantissa D0 10 Exponent D1 Mantissa D0 1000 to 9999 or 0 Exponent D1 41 to 35 The most significant bit of D0 and D1 specifies the positive or negative sign respectively and is handled as the complement of 2 respectively The mantissa D0 does not allow 100 for e...

Страница 157: ...al constant specification range is as follows When word data 16 bits is used K 32768 to K32767 When double data 32 bits is used K 2 147 483 648 to K2 147 483 647 5 2 2 Constant H hexadecimal number H indicates a hexadecimal number and is mainly used to specify numeric values as operands in applied instructions Example H1234 When using digits 0 to 9 the bit status 1 or 0 of each bit is equivalent t...

Страница 158: ...n 1 Character string data stored in word devices Example of data which can be Example of data which cannot be recognized as character string data recognized as character string data 2 Character string data stored in bit devices with digit specification Example of data which can be Examples of data which cannot be recognized as character string data recognized as character string data 2nd character...

Страница 159: ...f digits specified for bit devices is K1 to K3 or K1 to K7 in a 16 bit or 32 bit operation the insufficient high order bits are always regarded as 0 It means that such data is always positive Two digit BCD data expressed by X004 to X013 is converted into binary data and then transferred to D0 A bit device number can be specified arbitrarily but it is recommended to set the least significant digit ...

Страница 160: ... Buffer Memory U G A buffer memory BFM of a special function block or special extension unit can be specified directly BFM is 16 bit or 32 bit word data and is mainly used for operands in applied instructions For specifying a BFM specify the unit number U of a special function block or special extension unit and the BFM number G consecutively Example U0 G0 Indicates the BFM 0 in the special functi...

Страница 161: ...ons 1 32 bit counters and special auxiliary relays cannot be indexed with index registers 2 It is not permitted to use 16 bit counters as 32 bit counters by executing indexing 3 When an octal device number of X or Y is indexed with an index register the contents of the index register are converted into octal and then added to the device number For example when the value of an index register added ...

Страница 162: ...gure on the right Transfer K0 or K10 to the index register V3 in advance When X001 is set to ON D 0 0 D0 if V3 is 0 and K500 is transferred to D0 When X001 is set to ON D 0 10 D10 if V3 is 10 and K500 is transferred to D10 2 indexing operands in 32 bit instructions In a 32 bit instruction it is also necessary to specify a 32 bit index register in the instruction When an index register Z Z0 to Z7 i...

Страница 163: ...e indexed with index register the contents of an index register are converted into octal and then added to the device number In the example shown in the figure on the right Y007 to Y000 are output by MOV instruction and inputs are switched by indexing X007 to X000 X017 to X010 and X027 to X020 When rewriting the index value as K0 K8 K16 the device number converted into octal is added X000 0 X000 X...

Страница 164: ...to 9 store the input data to D0 and D2 Although the TKY instruction FNC 70 can only be programmed once modifying the head device number of the input data storage destination and pressed key information the information can be input from the two groups of keys numeric keypad from 0 to 9 Furthermore even if V is changed while this instruction is being executed this change is invalid The change is inv...

Страница 165: ...ogramming This chapter explains the I O processing relationship among instructions and programming method which should be understood before creating sequence programs 6 1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions In this manual applied instructions are explained in the following form For the expression methods and basic rules for applied instructions read in advance 6 5 General rules for applied ins...

Страница 166: ...ndicate an independent instruction not associated with the 16 bit or 32 bit type WDT FNC 07 Continuous lines on the upper left side indicates that 16 bit type is available D on the lower left side indicates that the 32 bit type is available MOV FNC 12 Dotted lines on the lower left side indicate that the 32 bit type does not exist Continuous lines on the upper left side indicate that only the 16 b...

Страница 167: ...Explanation of function and operation The function of each instruction is explained Cautions Cautions on using each instruction are described Errors Major errors that are possible to occur in each instruction are described For details on errors refer to Chapter 38 Errors and Error Code List Program examples Concrete program examples using each instruction are described 1 Bit devices X Input relay ...

Страница 168: ...an be simplified and the number of steps can be saved depending on the contact configuration method 1 It is recommended to write a circuit with many serial contacts in an upper position 2 It is recommended to write a circuit with many parallel contacts in a left position 2 Program execution and programming order A sequence program is executed from top to bottom and from left to right Code the sequ...

Страница 169: ...first coil Y003 the image memory turns ON and the output Y004 turns ON also because the input X001 is ON In the second coil Y003 however the image memory is set to OFF because the input X002 is OFF Accordingly the actual output to the outside is Y003 OFF Y004 ON 2 Countermeasures against double outputs Double outputs double coils do not cause illegal input program error but the operation is disrup...

Страница 170: ...t A circuit in which the current flows in both directions should be changed as shown in the figure on the right so that a circuit without D and a circuit without B are connected in parallel 2 Coil connection position Do not write a contact on the right side of a coil It is recommended to program a coil between contacts first The number of steps can be saved when a coil E between the contacts A and...

Страница 171: ...onger time than PLC cycle time Input filter response delay When the response delay of the input filter 10 ms is considered and the cycle time is supposed as 10 ms the ON duration and OFF duration should be at least 20 ms respectively Accordingly PLCs cannot handle input pulses at 25 Hz 1000 20 20 25 or more However the situation can be improved by PLC special functions and applied instructions Con...

Страница 172: ...mutual relationship among various program flow control instructions In the table below indicates containment relationship and indicates that zones are partially overlapped Top line Left line MC MCR MC MCR octet Example 1 Example 2 CJ P EI DI FOR NEXT STL RET P SRET I IRET FEND END O FEND O END no FEND CJ P EI DI FOR NEXT STL RET quintet 2 inside one STL 1 1 Example 1 MC CJ P MCR Instruction in lef...

Страница 173: ...ndicated by continuous lines is discribed 3 Instructions having containment relationship can be combined except some combinations as follows 1 MC MCR cannot be used in FOR NEXT STL RET P SRET and I RET 2 STL RET cannot be used in FOR NEXT P SRET and I IRET 3 MC MCR FOR NEXT P SRET and I IRET cannot be interrupted by I IRET SRET FEND END etc The first FEND or END is valid but the intended processes...

Страница 174: ...ressed as etc in the same way as sources m n Operands not falling under source or destination are expressed as m and n When indexing is allowed and there are two or more such operands they are expressed as m1 m2 n1 n2 etc in the same way as sources and destinations In applied instructions the program step of the instruction part always occupies 1 step but each operand occupies 2 or 4 steps dependi...

Страница 175: ...such as T C and D For avoiding confusion it is recommended to specify an even device number which will be the low order side for an operand in a 32 bit instruction 32 bit counter C200 to C255 is regarded as 32 bits and cannot be used as an operand in a 16 bit instruction 2 Pulse operation type and continuous operation type Pulse operation type In the example shown in the figure on the right when X...

Страница 176: ...n execution complete flag M8029 When two or more instruction execution complete flags M8029 are programmed together for applied instructions it is difficult to determine which instruction executes which flag For using flags in any positions other than directly under applied instructions refer to the next page M8000 FNC 72 DSW X10 Y10 D0 K1 FNC 22 MUL D0 K10 D20 M8029 Execution is completed M0 FNC ...

Страница 177: ...uctions When two or more applied instructions are programmed general flags turn ON or OFF when each applied instruction turns ON Accordingly when using a flag in any position other than directly under an applied instruction set to ON or OFF another device just under the applied instruction and then use the contact of the device as the command contact M8000 FNC 72 DSW X10 Y10 D0 K1 FNC 22 MUL D0 K1...

Страница 178: ...D8068 16 bits In the FX3G PLC D8068 stores the error occurrence step number Even if another error has occurred in another step the stored data is not updated and remains held until these devices are forcibly reset or until the power turns OFF When the error occurrence step is up to the 32767th step the error occurrence step can be checked in D8068 16 bits 6 5 4 Handling functions of extension flag...

Страница 179: ...tual relationship among program flow control instructions 1 Positioning instructions Do not drive FNC 57 PLSY FNC 58 PWM FNC 59 PLSR FNC150 DSZR FNC151 DVIT FNC156 ZRN FNC157 PLSV FNC158 DRVI and FNC159 DRVA instructions at the same time for the same output number 2 High speed processing instructions FX3U FX3UC PLC In FNC 53 HSCS FNC 54 HSCR and FNC 55 HSZ instructions including FNC280 HSCT instru...

Страница 180: ... or later the setting Read protect the execution program is available for the block password Refer to the GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common for the details on the block password Cautions In the PLC written by the computer using a project including a block password for which the setting Read protect the execution program is valid restoration of programs is enabled only when the PLC stores...

Страница 181: ... logical operation of rising edge pulse X Y M S D b T C Section 7 5 LDF Load Falling Pulse Initial logical operation of falling trailing edge pulse X Y M S D b T C Section 7 5 AND AND Serial connection of NO normally open contacts X Y M S D b T C Section 7 3 ANI AND Inverse Serial connection of NC normally closed contacts X Y M S D b T C Section 7 3 ANDP AND Pulse Serial connection of rising edge ...

Страница 182: ...operation result to trailing edge pulse Section 7 11 Out Instruction OUT OUT Final logical operation type coil drive Y M S D b T C Section 7 2 SET SET Set bit device latch ON Y M S D b Section 7 13 RST Reset Reset bit device OFF Y M S D b T C D R V Z Section 7 13 PLS Pulse Rising edge pulse Y M Section 7 12 PLF Pulse Falling Falling trailing edge pulse Y M Section 7 12 Master Control Instruction M...

Страница 183: ...d Z S2 State relays S cannot be indexed with index registers V and Z S3 D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S4 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 LD instruction initial logical operation NO contact type Instruc tion Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification Syste...

Страница 184: ...LD and LDI instructions When specifying a bit in data register input after a data register D number and then input a bit number 0 to F consecutively Only 16 bit data registers are available Specify a bit number as 0 1 2 9 A B F from the least significant bit Example In the example shown on the left LD contact is set to ON becomes conductive or OFF becomes non conductive by bit 3 of D0 1 This funct...

Страница 185: ...y in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 When a bit device is used A device described in OUT instruction turns ON or OFF according to the driven contact status Parallel OUT instructions can be used consecutively as many times as necessary In the program example shown below OUT M100 and OUT M101 are parallel If two or more OUT instructions are executed for the same device number...

Страница 186: ...or the set value by MOV instruction DSW instruction or display unit before driving the timer or counter 3 Setting range of timers and counters The table below shows the set value range of timers and counters the actual timer constants and the number of program steps including the set value for OUT instruction Timer counter Setting range Value of K or current value of D or R Actual set value Number...

Страница 187: ...fied as a device used in OUT instruction When specifying a bit in data register input after a data register D number and then input a bit number 0 to F consecutively Only 16 bit data registers are available Specify a bit number as 0 1 2 9 A B F from the least significant bit Example In the example shown on the left the bit 3 of D0 turns ON or OFF when X000 turns ON or OFF 1 This function is suppor...

Страница 188: ...d with index registers V and Z S3 D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S4 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 AND instruction serial connection of NO normally open contacts Instruc tion Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con st...

Страница 189: ...ter D 1 A bit in data register D can be specified as a device used in AND and ANI instructions When specifying a bit in data register input after a data register D number and then input a bit number 0 to F consecutively Only 16 bit data registers are available Specify a bit number as 0 1 2 9 A B F from the least significant bit Example In the example shown on the left AND contact turns ON becomes ...

Страница 190: ...List program K30 X000 Y003 AND instruction LD AND OUT LD ANI OUT AND OUT SP LD ANI OUT 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0010 0011 0012 X000 X001 Y003 X002 X003 Y004 X004 T0 K30 X005 T0 Y005 Contact connected in series X001 X002 Y004 ANI instruction X003 Contact connected in series ANI instruction T0 X004 AND instruction Contact connected in series Contact connected in series ...

Страница 191: ...cable devices S1 Special auxiliary relays M and 32 bit counters C cannot be indexed with index registers V and Z S2 State relays S cannot be indexed with index registers V and Z S3 D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S4 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 OR instruction parallel connec...

Страница 192: ...and Z State relays S special auxiliary relays M 32 bit counters and D b cannot be indexed The index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are available for indexing When the used device is an input X or output Y the value of an index register V or Z is converted into an octal number and then added Example When the value of V0 is 10 OR contact is set to ON becomes conductive or OFF becomes non conductive...

Страница 193: ...ata register D number and then input a bit number 0 to F consecutively Only 16 bit data registers are available Specify a bit number as 0 1 2 9 A B F from the least significant bit Example In the example shown on the left OR contact is set to ON becomes conductive or OFF becomes non conductive by bit 3 of D0 1 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Errors When an I O number used in OR ...

Страница 194: ...s Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P LDP 3 3 3 3 3 3 S LDF 3 3 3 3 3 3 S ANDP 3 3 3 3 3 3 S ANDF 3 3 3 3 3 3 S ORP 3 3 3 3 3 3 S ORF 3 3 3 3 3 3 S LDP Load Pulse Basic Instruction LDP Continuous Operation Pulse Single Operation Mnemonic Oper...

Страница 195: ...and ORP instructions initial logical operation of rising edge pulse serial connection of rising edge pulse and parallel connection of rising edge pulse In the example shown above M0 or M1 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 to X002 turn from OFF to ON ON ON ON ON X000 X001 M0 0000 LDP X000 0002 ORP X001 0004 OUT M0 0005 LD M8000 0006 ANDP X002 0008 OUT M1 M8000 X002 M1 RUN monitor Timi...

Страница 196: ...egister input after a data register D number and then input a bit number 0 to F consecutively Only 16 bit data registers are available Specify a bit number as 0 1 2 9 A B F from the least significant bit Example In the example shown on the left LDP contact turns ON becomes conductive or OFF becomes non conductive when bit 3 of D0 turns ON or OFF 1 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs...

Страница 197: ... Flow 9 FNC10 FNC19 Move Compare 10 FNC20 FNC29 Arith Logic Operation 4 Output drive side The following two circuits offer the same operation In each circuit M6 is ON during only one operation cycle when X010 turns from OFF to ON In each circuit MOV instruction is executed only once when X020 turns from OFF to ON X010 M6 X010 PLS M6 Operation cycle X010 M 6 OUT instruction Pulse instruction Operat...

Страница 198: ...to 3 detect the rising edge of M0 Because of LD instruction the contact 4 is conductive while M0 is ON M2800 to M3071 From M2800 driven by X000 the program is divided into the upper block block A and the lower block block B In each of the blocks A and B only the first contact which detects the rising or falling edge is activated Because of LD instruction the contact in the block C is conductive wh...

Страница 199: ... the device status is the same as the time when the instruction was executed last the instruction turns OFF 2 Cautions on writing during RUN 1 Instructions for falling edge pulse When writing is completed during RUN for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse LDF ANDF or ORF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed regardless of the ON OFF status of the ...

Страница 200: ...el circuits which can be connected by ORB instructions in the case of appropriate program shown above Though ORB instructions can be used at one time note that the repeated use of LD or LDI instruction is limited to 8 or less in the case of inappropriate program shown above Instruc tion Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Nu...

Страница 201: ...uction serial connection of multiple parallel circuits Caution There is no limitation in the number of ANB instruction Though ANB instructions can be used at one time note that the repeated use of LD or LDI instruction is limited to 8 or less in the same way as ORB instruction Instruc tion Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real...

Страница 202: ... final output circuit use MPP instruction instead of MRD instruction MPP instruction reads the stored data described above and then resets it Instruc tion Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P MPS There are no applicable devices MRD...

Страница 203: ... List 4 Devices in Detail 5 Specified the Device Constant 6 Before Programming 7 Basic Instruction 8 FNC00 FNC09 Program Flow 9 FNC10 FNC19 Move Compare 10 FNC20 FNC29 Arith Logic Operation Error MPS instruction can be used two or more times However the difference between number of MPS instructions and the number of MPP instructions should be 11 or less and should be 0 at the end ...

Страница 204: ... 0005 0006 OUT Y001 0007 LD X003 0008 0009 AND X004 0010 OUT Y002 0011 0012 AND X005 0013 OUT Y003 0014 LD X006 0015 0016 AND X007 0017 OUT Y004 0018 0019 AND X010 0020 OUT Y005 0021 0022 AND X011 0023 OUT Y006 0024 0025 AND X012 0026 OUT Y007 MPS MPP MPS MPP MPS MRD MRD MPP MPS Circuit program List program X000 X001 Y000 X002 MPS X003 Y001 X004 X005 X006 X007 Y002 Y003 X010 X011 MRD MPP 0000 LD X...

Страница 205: ...thout MPS instruction X000 X001 X002 Y000 Y001 MPP X003 X004 X005 Y002 Y003 MPS MPP X006 MPS MPS MPP 0000 LD X000 0001 0002 AND X001 0003 0004 AND X002 0005 OUT Y000 0006 0007 AND X003 0008 OUT Y001 0009 0010 AND X004 0011 0012 AND X005 0013 OUT Y002 0014 0015 AND X006 0016 OUT Y003 MPS MPS MPP MPP MPS MPP Circuit program List program X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003 Y004 MPS MPS MPS M...

Страница 206: ...XT EI and DI instruction not requiring a contact instruction exists in a circuit using master control such an instruction is executed regardless of the MC instruction execution command In the program example below the instructions from MC to MCR are executed as they are while the input X000 is ON However while the input X000 is OFF each driven device offers the following operation Timers except re...

Страница 207: ...nstruction is added between the MC instruction and the N instruction by write during RUN The PLC can detect errors after it is set to the STOP mode once and then to the RUN mode again Program examples 1 When the nesting structure is not adopted Circuit program List program X000 MC N 0 M100 N 0 M100 X001 Y000 X002 Y001 MCR N 0 X003 MC N 0 M150 N 0 M150 X004 Y002 X005 Y003 MCR N 0 0000 LD X000 0001 ...

Страница 208: ...N7 eight layers B A C B While X000 is OFF A N 1 N 2 X000 MC N 0 M100 N 0 M100 X001 Y000 X002 MC N 1 M101 N 1 M101 X003 Y001 X004 MC N 2 M102 N 2 M102 X005 Y002 MCR N 2 X006 Y003 MCR N 1 X007 Y004 MCR N 0 X010 Y005 N 0 N 1 N 2 N 0 D C While X002 is OFF While X004 is OFF Circuit program Level N0 The bus line B is active while X000 is ON Level N1 The bus line C is active while both X000 and X002 are ...

Страница 209: ...instruction cannot be used independently in parallel to a contact instruction 2 Operation range of INV instruction When INV instruction is used in a complicated circuit containing ORB and ANB instructions the operation range of INV instruction is as shown in the figure below INV instruction inverts the operation result after LD LDI LDP or LDF instruction located before INV instruction Accordingly ...

Страница 210: ...series 1 Instruction format 2 Applicable devices Explanation of function and operation 1 MEP instruction ON during rising edge of driving contacts results 2 MEF instruction ON during falling edge of driving contacts results Instruc tion Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX ...

Страница 211: ...he list program as LD or OR 3 Caution on writing during RUN 1 Pulse command during rising edge of operation MEP instruction results After writing to the circuit with MEP instructions during RUN the MEP instruction result turns ON conductive while the operation results up to the MEP instruction are ON 2 Pulse instruction during falling edge of operation MEF command results After writing to the circ...

Страница 212: ...operation cycle when X000 changes from OFF to ON 2 PLF instruction falling trailing edge pulse In the figure above M1 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 changes from ON to OFF Instruc tion Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify ...

Страница 213: ...atus of the operation condition device It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it to OFF for executing the instruction for falling edge pulse 2 Instructions for rising edge pulse When writing is completed during RUN for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse the instruction for rising edge pulse is executed if a target device...

Страница 214: ...n the way RUN STOP RUN or power supply ON RUN power supply OFF power supply ON RUN while a drive input remains ON PLS M600 does not operate However it is possible to operate PLS M600 latched device by resetting once using the ZRST instruction Circuit program M0 X000 M0 PLS M100 M0 Timing chart one operation cycle one operation cycle ZRST instruction execution ZRST instruction execution PLS instruc...

Страница 215: ...xtension register R or index register V Z RST instruction can be used to clear to 0 the contents of a data register D or index register V Z The same result can be obtained by MOV instruction which transfers the constant K0 RST instruction can be used also to reset the current value and return the contact of retentive type timers T246 to T255 SET and RST instructions can be used for the same device...

Страница 216: ...or 1 phase 1 input counters C235 to C245 use special auxiliary relays M8235 to M8245 for specifying the counting direction X010 in ON status Specifies down counting X010 in OFF status Specifies up counting When X011 turns ON the output contact of the counter CUUU is returned and the current value of the counter CUUU is reset to 0 In counters with reset input C241 C242 the same situation is achieve...

Страница 217: ... octal and then added Example When Z0 is 20 Y024 turns ON or OFF 1 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs 4 Bit specification of a data register D 1 A bit in data register D can be specified as a device used in SET or RST instruction When specifying a bit in data register input after a data register D number and then input a bit number 0 to F consecutively Only 16 bit data registers ar...

Страница 218: ...tions 1 Instruction format 2 Applicable devices Explanation of function and operation 1 NOP instruction no operation or null step NOP instruction specifies no operation If NOP operation is written in the middle of a program PLCs ignore it in executing the program When an existing program is replaced with NOP instructions it means that former instructions are deleted Instruc tion Bit Devices Word D...

Страница 219: ... steps after END instruction If END instruction is not written at the end of a program PLCs execute the program until the END step and then execute the output processing At the first execution after the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN PLCs start from END instruction When END instruction is executed the watchdog timer which checks the operation cycle is refreshed Caution Do not write END instr...

Страница 220: ...es X000 to X357 1 2 Y000 to Y357 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 M0 to M1535 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 M1536 to M3583 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 M3584 to M7679 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 S0 to S1023 1 2 2 2 2 S1024 to S4095 2 2 2 2 2 T0 to T191 T200 to T245 1 3 2 2 T192 to T199 T246 to T511 1 3 2 2 C0 to C199 1 3 2 2 C200 to C255 1 5 2 2 Special auxiliary relays M8000 to M8255 1 2 2 2 2 Special auxiliary relays M8256 to M8511 2 2 2 2 2 Bit devices with...

Страница 221: ...9 provide instructions mainly related to control flow of sequence programs such as conditional program execution and priority processing FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 00 CJ Conditional Jump Section 8 1 01 CALL Call Subroutine Section 8 2 02 SRET Subroutine Return Section 8 3 03 IRET Interrupt Return Section 8 4 04 EI Enable Interrupt Section 8 5 05 DI Disable Interrupt Section 8 6 06 F...

Страница 222: ...FX3U FX3UC n 0 to 4095 FX3G n 0 to 2047 P63 jumps to END instruction Pointer number Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 P FNC 00 CJ 16 bit Instruction 3 steps CJ CJP Continuous Operation Pulse Single Operation Mn...

Страница 223: ...r number step than CJ instruction However note that a watchdog timer error occurs when the scan time exceeds 200 ms default setting 3 Jumping to one label from two or more CJ instructions When the pointer number in operands is same and there is one label the following operation is caused When X020 turns ON the program execution jumps from CJ instruction corresponding to X020 to the label P9 When X...

Страница 224: ...nnot be shared by CALL instruction and CJ instruction 7 Unconditional jump if the command contact is normally ON Because M8000 is normally ON while a PLC is operating unconditional jump is specified when M8000 is used in the following example Label P 63 FNC 00 CJ P 63 END Do not program P63 X000 M8000 K10 FNC 01 CALLP C0 X001 P15 FNC 06 FEND RUN monitor normally ON FNC 02 SRET P15 Label User progr...

Страница 225: ...ant 6 Before Programming 7 Basic Instruction 8 FNC00 FNC09 Program Flow 9 FNC10 FNC19 Move Compare 10 FNC20 FNC29 Arith Logic Operation Program example 1 When a jump is necessary after OFF processing In one operation cycle after X023 changes from OFF to ON the CJ P7 instruction becomes valid By using this method jump can be executed after all outputs between the CJ P7 instruction and the label P7 ...

Страница 226: ...rent value is valid Operation of the routine timers T192 to T199 A routine timer continues its operation even if it is jumped after the coil is driven and the output contact is activated Operation of the high speed counters C235 to C255 A high speed counter continues its operation even if it is jumped after the coil is driven and the output contact is activated When each input changes during jump ...

Страница 227: ...the counter C0 remains reset Accordingly the current value of C0 remains 0 even if X012 turns ON To clear this reset status it is necessary to turn OFF the RST instruction for counter C0 Refer to the program shown below Timing chart Program example for activating a timer and counter even during a jump Timing chart X010 K10 C0 RST C0 X012 P0 FNC 00 CJ Label P0 X011 Jump operation by CJ instruction ...

Страница 228: ...R N 0 P 3 1 Jump from outside MC to outside MC Jump is available arbitrarily 2 Jump from outside MC to inside MC Jump is executed regardless of the MC operation Even if M0 is OFF M0 is regarded as ON after P1 3 Jump from inside MC to inside MC Jump is disabled while M0 is OFF 4 Jump from inside MC to outside MC Jump is disabled while M0 is OFF Jump is executed while M0 is ON but MCR is invalid CJ ...

Страница 229: ...function and operation 1 16 bit operation While the command input is ON CALL instruction is executed and the program execution jumps to a step with a label Then a subroutine program with the label is executed When SRET FNC 02 instruction is executed the program execution returns to the step after CALL instruction At the end of the main program put FEND instruction Put a label P for CALL instructio...

Страница 230: ...d Label P 10 FNC 01 CALL P 10 FNC 06 FEND FNC 02 SRET END X000 Main program While X000 is ON the program execution jumps to a step with the label P10 Subroutine program When SRET instruction is executed after the subroutine program has executed the program execution returns to the original step 1 Label P 11 Label P 12 FNC 01 CALLP P 11 FNC 06 FEND FNC 01 CALL P 12 FNC 02 SRET FNC 02 SRET END Main ...

Страница 231: ...ed in a subroutine note that the output contact is activated when the first coil instruction or subroutine is executed after the timer reaches its set value 3 Countermeasures against latches of devices used in subroutines or interrupt routines Devices which were set to ON in a subroutine are latched in the ON status even after the subroutine is finished Refer to the program example shown below Whe...

Страница 232: ...0 FNC 01 CALLP RST C0 X002 P0 FNC 06 FEND RST C0 FNC 02 SRET P0 RST Y007 Y007 is reset at an arbitrary timing The preceding RST C0 instruction is deactivated in the subroutine B M8001 RUN monitor normally OFF A Y007 X001 C0 K10 Execution of P0 is triggered by X000 X001 Current value of C0 1 2 3 Y007 is reset RST C0 Y007 Subroutine is executed 1 2 3 4 X002 Counter reset instruction is deactivated p...

Страница 233: ...on format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices Explanation of function and operation When CALL instruction in the main program is executed the program execution jumps to a subroutine SRET instruction returns the program execution to the main routine Refer to Section 8 2 Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification ...

Страница 234: ...UC PLCs For the interrupt function refer to Chapter 36 Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P There are no applicable devices Function Interrupt No Description Ref...

Страница 235: ... original main program by IRET instruction The timer interrupt of the pointer I620 is executed every timer time of 20 ms and the program execution is returned to the original main program by IRET instruction each time The high speed counter interrupt of the pointer I010 is executed when the current value of a high speed counter becomes equivalent to a value specified by DHSCS FNC 53 instruction Th...

Страница 236: ...ces Explanation of function and operation EI instruction is the independent type and does not require command drive contact For the interrupt function refer to Chapter 36 Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b ...

Страница 237: ...plicable devices Explanation of function and operation DI instruction is the independent type and does not require command drive contact For the interrupt function refer to Chapter 36 Cautions Interrupts requests generated after DI instruction are processed after EI FNC 04 instruction is executed Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others ...

Страница 238: ...turns to the step 0 FEND instruction is required in creating subroutine programs and interrupt programs 1 In the case of CJ instruction Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Mod...

Страница 239: ...struction 2 When CALL or CALLP instruction is used Put a label after FEND instruction And the SRET instruction is required in every case 3 When CALL or CALLP instruction is used If FEND instruction is executed after CALL or CALLP instruction was executed and before SRET instruction is executed an error is caused 4 When FOR instruction is used If FEND instruction is executed after FOR instruction w...

Страница 240: ...ing units cam switches analog units and link units are connected the buffer memory initialization time may become longer thus the operation time may become longer and a watchdog timer error may occur 2 Caution when many FROM TO instructions are driven at one time When many FROM TO instructions are executed or when many buffer memories are transferred the scan time may become longer and a watchdog ...

Страница 241: ...d inserting WDT instruction between them the operation cycle becomes less than 200 ms in both the former half portion and the latter half portion 2 When a label P of CJ instruction is located in a step number smaller than the step number of CJ instruction Put WDT instruction after the label P If an input relay X is used as the command contact input refresh is disabled so the program execution cann...

Страница 242: ...to NEXT FNC 09 instruction Related instruction FOR instruction and NEXT FNC 09 instruction are set as a pair in programming Operand type Description Data type Number of repetition of the loop between FOR and NEXT instructions K1 to K32767 A value from 32768 to 0 is handled as 1 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Inde...

Страница 243: ...loop is repeated by the specified number of times steps after NEXT instruction are executed Related instruction NEXT instruction and FOR FNC 08 instruction are set as a pair in programming Caution 1 Limitation in the number of nesting FOR NEXT loop can be nested up to 5 levels Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Sp...

Страница 244: ...T instruction does not exist FOR When NEXT instruction is located before FOR instruction FOR When number of FOR instructions is not equivalent to the number of NEXT instructions NEXT FOR Not programmed FOR NEXT When NEXT instruction is located after FEND or END instruction FOR FEND END NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT Not programmed The loop 3 is repeated 4 times When the data value current value of D0Z D4 whe...

Страница 245: ...ovide fundamental data processing instructions such as data transfer and data comparison which are regarded as most important in applied instructions FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 10 CMP Compare Section 9 1 11 ZCP Zone Compare Section 9 2 12 MOV Move Section 9 3 13 SMOV Shift Move Section 9 4 14 CML Complement Section 9 5 15 BMOV Block Move Section 9 6 16 FMOV Fill Move Section 9 7 17 ...

Страница 246: ...rand Type Description Data Type Data or device number handled as comparison value 16 or 32 bit binary Data or device number handled as comparison source 16 or 32 bit binary Head bit device number to which comparison result is output Bit Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M ...

Страница 247: ...rol Program examples 1 When comparing the current value of a counter If it is necessary to clear the comparison result when the instruction is not executed add the following contents under the above program 1 RST instruction 2 ZRST instruction S1 S1 S2 S2 D D D S1 S1 S2 S2 FNC 10 DCMP Even if the command input turns OFF and DCMP instruction is not executed 1 and 2 latch the status just before the ...

Страница 248: ...ption Data Type Data or device number handled as lower comparison value 16 or 32 bit binary Data or device number handled as upper comparison value 16 or 32 bit binary Data or device number handled as comparison source 16 or 32 bit binary Head bit device number to which comparison result is output Bit Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special...

Страница 249: ...e The lower comparison value should be smaller than the upper comparison value 1 When the lower comparison value is smaller than the upper comparison value 2 When the lower comparison value is larger than the upper comparison value S1 S1 S2 S2 S S D D D FNC 11 DZCP Even if the command input turns OFF and ZCP instruction is not executed 1 and 2 latch the status just before the command input turns O...

Страница 250: ...and Type Description Data Type Transfer source data or device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Transfer destination device number 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3...

Страница 251: ...nsfer source 1 it is automatically converted into binary When specifying digits of a bit device K8X000 K8Y000 The bit device transfers a maximum of 32 points multiple of 4 When a word device is specified The word device transfers 1 point 50 50 0 ON Command contact S D Before execution After execution K50 K0 D10 D50 K50 K50 FNC 12 MOV D10 D50 Transfer S D Command input S S D D D S S FNC 12 DMOV S D...

Страница 252: ... as shown below 4 When transferring 32 bit data Make sure to use DMOV instruction for transferring the operation result of an applied instruction such as MUL whose operation result is output in 32 bits and for transferring a 32 bit numeric value or transferring the current value of a high speed counter C235 to C255 which is a 32 bit device X001 FNC 12 MOV T 0 D 20 Current value of T0 D20 The opera...

Страница 253: ... PLCs Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing data whose digits will be moved 16 bit binary m1 Head digit position to be moved 16 bit binary m2 Number of digits to be moved 16 bit binary Word device number storing data whose digits are moved 16 bit binary n Head digit position of movement destination 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digi...

Страница 254: ...ted into binary and stored to 2 Extension function When M8168 is set to ON first and then SMOV instruction is executed conversion from binary to BCD is not executed Data is moved in units of 4 bits Program example The data on three digit digital switches are composed and stored as binary data to D2 S D D D D D S D FNC 13 SMOV m1 m2 n S D Command input 4th digit 1st digit 2nd digit 3rd digit 100 10...

Страница 255: ...onverted into binary This operation is useful when a logically inverted output is required as an output from a PLC Operand Type Description Data Type Data to be inverted or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number storing inverted data 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con s...

Страница 256: ...y CML instruction 2 When four bits are specified for a device with digit specification S S D D S S FNC 14 DCML 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 to b7 b6 n5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Sign bit 0 Positive 1 Negative Inverted data is transferred When command contact turns ON S D S S D D S D Command input FNC 14 CML K1X000 K1M0 X000 X001 X002 X003 M 0 M 1...

Страница 257: ...he transfer number range is overlapped To prevent overwriting before transfer of source data data is automatically transferred in the order 1 2 3 according to the number overlap status Operand Type Description Data Type Transfer source data or device number storing data 16 bit binary Transfer destination device number 16 bit binary n Number of transferred points n 512 16 bit binary Oper and Type B...

Страница 258: ... when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP Caution When specifying digits of bit devices specify the same number of digits for and BMOV direction inverse flag Transfer direction M8024 1 OFF D5 D10 D6 D11 D7 D12 M8024 1 ON D5 D10 D6 D11 D7 D12 X000 FNC 15 BMOVP D5 D10 K3 X001 M8024 BMOV direction inverse flag M8001 M8024 BMOV direction inverse flag OFF Normally OFF during operation n 1 1 S D S ...

Страница 259: ...umber register update mode make sure that the file register number is equivalent between and 2 When using file registers in the same number register update mode make sure that the number of transfer points specified by n does not exceed the file register area 3 If the file register area is exceeded while file registers are used in the same number register update mode an operation error M8067 is ca...

Страница 260: ...00 times When a continuous operation type instruction is used for data writing in a program data is written to the memory in every operation cycle of the PLC To prevent this make sure to use a pulse operation type instruction BMOVP 7 File register operation File registers are secured inside the built in memory or memory cassette Different from general data registers file registers can be read and ...

Страница 261: ...mand input is OFF the transfer destination does not change While the command input is ON the data of the transfer source does not change When a constant K is specified as the transfer source it is automatically converted into binary Operand Type Description Data Type Transfer source data or device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Head word device number of transfer destination Same data is ...

Страница 262: ...the possible range While the command input is OFF the transfer destination 1 does not change While the command input is ON the data of the transfer source 1 does not change When a constant K is specified as the transfer source 1 it is automatically converted into binary Program example 1 When writing specified data to two or more devices S S D D D D S S S S X000 FNC 16 DFMOV n S D 1 1 n 3 2 5 4 7 ...

Страница 263: ...ata Type Device number storing data to be exchanged 16 or 32 bit binary Device number storing data to be exchanged 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D...

Страница 264: ...th each other Because this instruction works in the same way as SWAP FNC147 instruction use SWAP instruction when programming a new exchange In a 32 bit operation high order 8 bits byte and low order 8 bits byte of each word device are exchanged for each other Error An operation error occurs in the following case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When M8160 is ON ...

Страница 265: ...nary coded decimal BCD data and transfers the converted BCD data to The data of can be converted if it is ranging from K0 to K9999 BCD The table below shows digit specification for and Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing the conversion source binary data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number of the conversion destination binary coded decimal data 16 or 32 bit binary Oper...

Страница 266: ...structions When receiving the digital switch information in the binary coded decimal BCD format into a PLC use BIN FNC 19 instruction for converting BCD data into binary data When outputting data to the seven segment display unit handling binary coded decimal BCD data use BCD FNC 18 instruction for converting binary data into BCD data Errors In BCD or BCDP 16 bit type instructions an operation err...

Страница 267: ...pare 10 FNC20 FNC29 Arith Logic Operation Program examples 1 When the seven segment display unit has 1 digit 2 When the seven segment display unit has 2 to 4 digits 3 When the seven segment display unit has 5 to 8 digits FNC 18 BCD D0 K1Y000 X000 PLC FNC 18 BCD D0 K2Y000 X000 PLC Output destination In the case of 2 digits K2 In the case of 3 digits K3 In the case of 4 digits K4 K4 K3 K2 K1 FNC 18 ...

Страница 268: ...erted if it is ranging from K0 to K9999 BCD The table below shows digit specification for and Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing the conversion source binary coded decimal data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number of the conversion destination binary 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Un...

Страница 269: ...Handling of BCD inputs and outputs Binary data is used in all operations in PLCs including arithmetic operations and increment and decrement instructions When receiving the digital switch information in the binary coded decimal BCD format into a PLC use BIN FNC 19 instruction for converting BCD data into binary data When outputting data to the seven segment display unit handling binary coded decim...

Страница 270: ...h has 5 to 8 digits FNC 19 BIN K1X000 D0 X000 MOV instruction can be used instead PLC FNC 12 MOV K1X000 D0 X000 6 In the case of 2 digits K2 In the case of 3 digits K3 In the case of 4 digits K4 FNC 19 BIN K2X000 D0 PLC K4 K3 K2 K1 9 7 8 6 Digital switch input Output destination X000 PLC 9 7 8 6 5 3 4 2 K4 K3 K2 K1 K8 K7 K6 K5 FNC 19 DBIN K5X000 D0 X000 Digital switch input Output destination In t...

Страница 271: ...thmetic operation instructions in the floating point format For details refer to the explanation of each instruction For the floating point operation refer to Chapter 18 FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 20 ADD Addition Section 10 1 21 SUB Subtraction Section 10 2 22 MUL Multiplication Section 10 3 23 DIV Division Section 10 4 24 INC Increment Section 10 5 25 DEC Decrement Section 10 6 26 ...

Страница 272: ... to 1 The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign positive 0 or negative 1 and data is added algebraically 5500 8540 3040 When a constant K is specified in 1 or 1 it is automatically converted into binary format Operand type Description Data type Data for addition or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Data for addition or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit b...

Страница 273: ...g the same device in the source and destination The same device number can be specified for both the source and the destination In this case note that the addition result changes in every operation cycle if a continuous operation type instruction ADD or DADD is used Device Name Description M8020 Zero ON When the operation result is 0 OFF When the operation result is not 0 M8021 Borrow ON When the ...

Страница 274: ...0 every time X001 turns from OFF to ON ADD P instruction is similar to INCP instruction described later except the contents shown in the table below ADD ADDP DADD or DADDP instruction INC INCP DINC DINCP instruction Flag zero borrow or carry Operates Does not operate Operation result 16 bit operation 1 32767 0 1 2 32767 32768 32767 1 2 1 0 32768 32 bit operation 1 2 147 483 647 0 1 2 2 147 483 647...

Страница 275: ... bit operation DSUB and DSUBP The contents of 1 are subtracted from 1 in binary format and the subtraction result is transferred to 1 The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign positive 0 or negative 1 and data is subtracted algebraically 5500 8540 14040 When a constant K is specified in 1 or 1 it is automatically converted into binary format Operand type Description Data type Data f...

Страница 276: ...e destination In this case note that the addition result changes in every operation cycle if a continuous operation type instruction SUB or DSUB is used Device Name Description M8020 Zero ON When the operation result is 0 OFF When the operation result is other than 0 M8021 Borrow ON When the operation result is less than 32768 in 16 bit operation or 2 147 483 648 in 32 bit operation OFF When the o...

Страница 277: ...SUB instruction and the DEC instruction used by a program for subtracting 1 When SUB P is executed 1 is subtracted from the contents of D0 every time X001 turns from OFF to ON SUB P instruction is similar to DECP instruction described later except the contents shown in the table below D SUB P instruction D DEC P instruction Flag zero borrow or carry Operates Does not operate Operation result 16 bi...

Страница 278: ...data is multiplied algebraically 5 8 40 When a constant K is specified in or it is automatically converted into binary format Operand type Description Data type Data for multiplication or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Data for multiplication or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Head word device number storing the multiplication result 32 or 64 bit binary Ope...

Страница 279: ... binary format When a digit K1 to K8 is specified for 3 2 1 The result is obtained only for low order 32 bits and is not obtained for high order 32 bits Transfer the data to word devices once then execute the operation Related devices 1 Relationship between flag operation and numeric value 1 Available in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 30 or later Device Name Description M8304 1 Zero ON Wh...

Страница 280: ...lt 64 bits cannot be monitored at one time In such a case floating point operation is recommended For the floating point operation refer to Chapter 18 Program examples 1 16 bit operation 2 32 bit operation Function Changes According to Versions Compatible Versions Item Function Summary FX3G FX3U FX3UC Ver 1 00 or later Ver 2 30 or later Ver 2 30 or later Zero Flag Turns the special device M8304 ON...

Страница 281: ...ically 36 5 7 quotient 1 remainder Two devices in total starting from are occupied to store the operation result quotient and remainder Make sure that these two devices are not used for another control When a constant K is specified as or it is automatically converted into binary format Operand type Description Data type Data for division or word device number storing data dividend 16 or 32 bit bi...

Страница 282: ...tient and remainder indicates the sign positive 0 negative 1 respectively The quotient is negative when either the dividend or divisor is negative The remainder is negative when the dividend is negative 2 Device specified as The remainder is not obtained when a bit device is specified with digit specification In a 32 bit operation by DDIV or DDIVP Z cannot be specified as Error When the divisor is...

Страница 283: ...nges According to Versions Compatible Versions Item Function Summary FX3G FX3U FX3UC Ver 1 00 or later Ver 2 30 or later Ver 2 30 or later Zero Flag Turns M8304 ON when the operation result of DIV instruc tion is 0 Carry Flag Turns M8306 ON when the operation result of DIV instruc tion overflows 16 bit operation Only when the maximum negative value 32 768 is divided by 1 32 bit operation Only when...

Страница 284: ...Flag operations 1 16 bit operation When 32767 is incremented by 1 the result is 32768 Flags zero carry and borrow are not activated at this time 2 32 bit operation When 2 147 483 647 is incremented by 1 the result is 2 147 483 648 Flags zero carry and borrow are not activated at this time Operand type Description Data type Word device number storing data to be incremented by 1 16 or 32 bit binary ...

Страница 285: ...ramming 7 Basic Instruction 8 FNC00 FNC09 Program Flow 9 FNC10 FNC19 Move Compare 10 FNC20 FNC29 Arith Logic Operation Program example X010 M 1 X011 FNC 12 MOVP K 0 Z FNC 18 BCDP C 0Z K4Y000 FNC 24 INCP Z FNC 10 CMPP K 10 Z M 0 0 Z C 0Z K4Y000 BIN BCD Z 1 Z When Z is 10 M1 turns ON The current values of counters C0 to C9 are converted into BCD format and output to K4Y000 Z is cleared by the reset ...

Страница 286: ... decremented by 1 the result is 32767 Flags zero carry and borrow are not activated at this time 2 32 bit operation When 2 147 483 648 is decremented by 1 the result is 2 147 483 647 Flags zero carry and borrow are not activated at this time Operand type Description Data type Word device number storing data to be decremented by 1 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others Sy...

Страница 287: ...When a constant K is specified in the transfer sources and it is automatically converted into binary format The logical product operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 ON 0 OFF Operand type Description Data type Data used for logical product or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Data used for logical product or word device number...

Страница 288: ...nput is OFF the data of the transfer destination 1 does not change While the command input is ON the data of the transfer source 1 1 do not change When a constant K is specified in the transfer source 1 1 it is automatically converted into binary format The logical product operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 ON 0 OFF 1 1 1 DAND FNC 26 instruc...

Страница 289: ...ge When a constant K is specified in the transfer sources and it is automatically converted into binary format The logical sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 ON 0 OFF Operand type Description Data type Data used for logical sum or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Data used for logical sum or word device number storing ...

Страница 290: ...ut is OFF the data of the transfer destination 1 does not change While the command input is ON the data of the transfer source 1 1 do not change When a constant K is specified in the transfer source 1 1 it is automatically converted into binary format The logical sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 ON 0 OFF 1 1 1 DOR FNC 27 instruction Lo...

Страница 291: ...en a constant K is specified in the transfer sources and it is automatically converted into binary format The logical exclusive sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 ON 0 OFF Operand type Description Data type Data used for exclusive logical sum or word device number storing data 16 or 32 bit binary Data used for exclusive logical sum or wo...

Страница 292: ...put is ON the data of the transfer source 1 1 do not change When a constant K is specified in the transfer source 1 1 it is automatically converted into binary format The exclusive logical sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 ON 0 OFF Program example By combining WXOR and CML FNC 14 instructions the exclusive logical sum not XORNOT operati...

Страница 293: ... is stored in the original device 2 32 bit operation DNEG and DNEGP Each bit of 1 is inverted 0 1 1 0 1 is added and then the result is stored in the original device Caution Note that the complement is obtained in every operation cycle in a continuous operation type instruction Operand type Description Data type Word device number which stores data for obtaining complement and will store the opera...

Страница 294: ...ion M 0 FNC 29 NEGP D 10 M8000 FNC 44 BON D 10 M 0 K 15 RUN monitor In BON ON bit check instruction M0 turns ON when the bit 15 b15 among b0 to b15 of D10 is 1 NEGP instruction is executed for D10 only when M0 turns ON D10 D10 X000 M 10 M 11 M 12 FNC 21 SUB D 10 D 20 D 30 FNC 21 SUB D 20 D 10 D 30 FNC 10 CMP D 10 D 20 M 10 D 10 D 20 D10 D 20 D 10 D 20 M 10 ON M 11 ON M 12 ON In the case of D10 D20...

Страница 295: ... and Shift Operation FNC 30 to FNC 39 FNC 30 to FNC 39 provide instructions for rotating and shifting bit data and word data in specified directions FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 30 ROR Rotation Right Section 11 1 31 ROL Rotation Left Section 11 2 32 RCR Rotation Right with Carry Section 11 3 33 RCL Rotation Left with Carry Section 11 4 34 SFTR Bit Shift Right Section 11 5 35 SFTL Bit ...

Страница 296: ...32 bit binary n Number of bits to be rotated n 16 16 bit instruction n 32 32 bit instruction 1 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P S1 S1 S1 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 n 3 3 3 3 P FNC 30 ROR D 16 bit Instruc...

Страница 297: ... time operation cycle When a device with digit specification is specified as Only K4 16 bit instruction or K8 32 bit instruction is valid examples K4Y010 or K8M0 Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DROR D100 R0 n is R1 R0 Device Name Description M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the lowest position is 1 D ...

Страница 298: ...2 bit binary n Number of bits to be rotated n 16 16 bit instruction n 32 32 bit instruction 1 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P S1 S1 S1 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 n 3 3 3 3 16 bit Instruction 5 steps Mne...

Страница 299: ...very scan time operation cycle When a device with digit specification is specified as Only K4 16 bit instruction or K8 32 bit instruction is valid examples K4Y010 or K8M0 Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DROL D100 R0 n is R1 R0 Device Name Description M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the highest positi...

Страница 300: ... rotated n 16 16 bit instruction n 32 32 bit instruction 1 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P S S S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 n 3 3 3 3 P FNC 32 RCR D 16 bit Instruction 5 steps Mnemonic Operation Conditio...

Страница 301: ...s Only K4 16 bit instruction or K8 32 bit instruction is valid examples K4Y010 or K8M0 Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DRCR D100 R0 n is R1 R0 Device Name Description M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the lowest position is 1 D D Before shift b3 Carry flag M8022 When M8022 is OFF 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Страница 302: ...otated n 16 16 bit instruction n 32 32 bit instruction 1 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P S S S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 n 3 3 3 3 16 bit Instruction 5 steps Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Oper...

Страница 303: ...bit instruction or K8 32 bit instruction is valid examples K4Y010 or K8M0 Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DRCL D100 R0 n is R1 R0 Device Name Description M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the highest position is 1 D D Command input FNC 33 DRCLP n D Carry flag When M8022 is ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 ...

Страница 304: ... PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available Operand Type Description Data Type Head bit device number to be stored to the shift data after rightward shift Bit Head bit device number to be shifted rightward Bit n1 Bit length of the shift data n2 n1 1024 16 bit binary n2 Number of bits to be shifted rightward n2 n1 1024 1 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System...

Страница 305: ...ting from n2 bits are shifted rightward 1 and 2 shown below After shift n2 bits from are transferred to n2 bits from n1 n2 3 shown below Caution Note that n2 bits are shifted every time the command input turns from OFF to ON in the SFTRP instruction but that n2 bits are shifted in each scan time operation cycle in SFTR instruction Error If the transfer source is equivalent to the shifted device in...

Страница 306: ...shown below Operand Type Description Data Type Head bit device number to be stored to the shift data after leftward shift Bit Head bit device number to be shifted leftward Bit n1 Bit length of the shift data n2 n1 1024 16 bit binary n2 Number of bits to be shifted leftward n2 n1 1024 1 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special U...

Страница 307: ...ach operation cycle in the SFTL instruction Error If the transfer source is equivalent to the shifted device in FX3U FX3UC PLCs an operation error occurs error code K6710 An operation error does not occur in FX3G PLCs Program example conditional stepping of 1 bit data By setting X000 to X007 to ON in turn Y000 to Y007 are activated in turn If the order is wrong activation is disabled S D X000 S 0 ...

Страница 308: ...LCs M100 Input data M101 to M117 octal number 15 step shift register 2 FX3G FX3U and FX3UC PLCs X000 X001 X002 OUT SFT RST M100 M117 data input shift input reset input LD OUT LD SFT LD RST Circuit program List program 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 X000 M100 X001 M100 X002 M100 X000 FNC 35 SFTLP M100 M101 K 15 K 1 X001 X002 FNC 40 ZRST M101 M115 M100 data input shift input reset input M101 to M115 ...

Страница 309: ...hift n2 words starting from are shifted to n2 words starting from n1 n2 3 shown below Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number to be stored to the shift data after rightward shift 16 bit binary Head word device number storing data to be shifted rightward 16 bit binary n1 Word data length of the shift data n2 n1 512 16 bit binary n2 Number of words to be shifted rightward n2 n1 512 1 1...

Страница 310: ...ed in each operation cycle in the WSFR instruction Error If the transfer source is equivalent to the shifted device an operation error occurs error code K6710 Program example 1 Shifting devices with digit specification S D 3 2 1 X007 X006 X005 X004 X003 X002 X001 X000 Y017 Y016 Y015 Y014 Y013 Y012 Y011Y010 Y007 Y006 Y005 Y004 Y003 Y002 Y001 Y000 Make sure that the number of digits is equivalent Kn...

Страница 311: ...n of function and operation 1 16 bit operation WSFL and WSFLP For n1 word devices starting from n2 words are shifted leftward 1 and 2 shown below After shift n2 words starting from are shifted to n2 words starting from 3 shown below Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number to be stored to the shift data after leftward shift 16 bit binary Head word device number storing data to be shif...

Страница 312: ...or occurs error code K6710 Program example 1 Shifting devices with digit specification 8 2 n2 in the case of n2 3 n1 in the case of n1 9 1 Overflow data to be deleted 1 D 7 6 5 4 3 8 7 6 D 5 4 3 2 D 1 5 to before shift n2 3 D 3 Copy 2 n2 bits are shifted leftward n2 3 2 to before shift n2 3 2 1 D Before execution After execution S S S D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D S S S D 3 2 1 X007 X006 X005 X004...

Страница 313: ...control 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 1 1 is required for the pointer 3 Applicable devices S This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing data to be put in first 16 bit binary Head word device number storing data The first word device works as the pointer and data is stored in 1 and later 16 bit binary n Number of store points p...

Страница 314: ... Use the pulse operation type SFWRP instruction in programming 3 Data is stored from the right end in the same way and the number of stored data is specified by the contents of the pointer Related device For the carry flag use method refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Related instructions Caution 1 In the case of continuous operation type SFWR instruction Note that data is stored overwritten in each scan t...

Страница 315: ...mber is hexadecimal and up to 4 digits Up to 99 products can be stored in the warehouse 2 Program X020 FNC 12 MOVP K4X000 D256 FNC 38 SFWRP D256 D257 K100 X021 FNC 39 SFRDP D257 D357 K100 FNC 12 MOV D357 K4Y000 M8000 RUN monitor Button for request to take a product out of warehouse Button for request to put a product into warehouse The product number is input from X000 to X017 and transferred to D...

Страница 316: ...ord 1 is subtracted from the number of data stored in Operand Type Description Data Type Head word device number storing data The first word device works as the pointer and data is stored in 1 and later 16 bit binary Word device number storing data taken out first 2 n 512 16 bit binary n Number of store points plus 1 1 2 n 512 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User...

Страница 317: ... Related device For the zero flag use method refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Related instructions Caution 1 Data after reading was executed The contents of n do not change by reading 2 In the case of continuous operation type SFRD instruction Data is read in turn in each scan time operation cycle but the contents of n do not change 3 When pointer is 0 Data is not processed and the contents of do not cha...

Страница 318: ...ting special processing FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 40 ZRST Zone Reset Section 12 1 41 DECO Decode Section 12 2 42 ENCO Encode Section 12 3 43 SUM Sum of Active Bits Section 12 4 44 BON Check Specified Bit Status Section 12 5 45 MEAN Mean Section 12 6 46 ANS Timed Annunciator Set Section 12 7 47 ANR Annunciator Reset Section 12 8 48 SQR Square Root Section 12 9 49 FLT Conversion to F...

Страница 319: ...tion 1 16 bit operation ZRST and ZRSTP Same type of devices from to are reset at one time When and are bit devices 1 OFF reset is written to the entire range from to at one time Operand type Description Data type Head bit or word device number to be reset at one time Specify same type of devices 16 bit binary Last bit or word device number to be reset at one time 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit De...

Страница 320: ...tion 0 can be written to word devices KnY KnM KnS T C D and R at one time Cautions 1 Caution on specifying devices Specify same type of devices in and The device number of should be smaller than or equal to the device number of If the device number of is larger than the device number of only one device specified in is reset D1 D1 D1 D2 D1 D1 D1 D2 FNC 40 ZRST Devices through are reset at one time ...

Страница 321: ...s can be specified in and However it is not possible to specify a 16 bit counter in and specify a 32 bit counter in and should be the same type Example Program example 1 When using devices in the latch area as non latch type devices In the program shown below when the power to the PLC is turned ON or when the PLC mode is changed to RUN the specified ranges of bit devices and word devices are reset...

Страница 322: ...ing result 16 bit binary n Number of bits of device storing the decoding result n 1 to 8 No processing is executed in the case of n 0 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ...

Страница 323: ...ue expressed in 2n on the low order side of is decoded to When all bits of are 0 b0 of the word device turns ON In the case of n 3 all of high order bits of become 0 turn OFF Caution While the command input is OFF the instruction is not executed The activated decode output is held in the previous ON OFF status When n is 0 the instruction executes no processing D1 D D1 S D1 D D1 S D1 D D1 D Turns O...

Страница 324: ...word devices according to the contents of bit devices The value expressed by X000 to X002 is decoded to D0 X000 and X001 are ON and X002 is OFF in this example When the values expressed by X000 to X002 are 3 1 2 0 b3 which is the 4th from b0 becomes 1 turns ON When all of X000 to X002 are 0 OFF b0 becomes 1 turns ON M8000 FNC 41 DECO D 0 M 0 K 4 S D n Turns ON when D0 is K0 D0 b4 to b15 0 0 0 0 1 ...

Страница 325: ...sitions among 2n bits 1 n 8 from are encoded to When n is 8 28 256 bits which is the maximum value are occupied The encoding result of is 0 OFF from the most significant bit to the low order bit n Operand type Description Data type Data to be encoded or word device number storing data 16 bit binary Word device number storing the encoding result 16 bit binary n Number of bits of device storing the ...

Страница 326: ...e low order bit n Cautions 1 When two or more bits are ON in the data The low order side is ignored and only the ON position on the high order side is encoded 2 While the command input is OFF The instruction is not executed Activated encode outputs are latched in the previous ON OFF status D1 S D1 S D1 D D1 D Command input FNC 42 ENCO n S D When it is T C D R U G V or Z 1 n 4 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1...

Страница 327: ...ON Operand type Description Data type Word device number storing the source data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number storing the result data 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ...

Страница 328: ... 1 0 6 0006 2 OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 0007 3 OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 0008 1 OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 0009 2 OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 10 000A 2 OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 11 000B 3 OFF OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 5 FFFB 15 OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 4 FFFC 14 OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 FFFD 15 OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1...

Страница 329: ...NC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Caution While the command input is OFF the instruction is not executed The output of the number of bits in the ON status is latched in the previous status Program example When X000 is ON the number of bits in the ON status in D0 is counted and stored to D2 X000 S D The number of 1 in D0 is stored to D2 FNC ...

Страница 330: ...rand type Description Data type Word device number storing the source data 16 or 32 bit binary Bit device number to be driven Bit n Bit position to be checked n 0 to 15 16 bit instruction 0 to 31 32 bit instruction 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T ...

Страница 331: ...ON When the bit n is OFF is set to OFF When a constant K is specified as the transfer source 1 it is automatically converted into binary format Caution Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DBON D0 M0 R0 n is R1 R0 Program example When the bit 9 n 9 in D10 is 1 ON M0 is set to 1 ON D1 S D1 S D1 D D1 D D1 D D1 S D1 S 1 Command...

Страница 332: ...d Operand type Description Data type Head word device number storing data to be averaged 16 or 32 bit binary Word device number storing the mean value result 16 or 32 bit binary n Number of data to be averaged 1 n 64 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M ...

Страница 333: ...Data Transfer 2 18 FNC110 FNC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Caution When a device number is exceeded n is handled as a smaller value in the possible range Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DMEAN D0 D100 R0 n is R1 R0 Error When n is any value outside the range fro...

Страница 334: ...type Timer number for evaluation time 16 bit binary m Evaluation time data m 1 to 32767 unit 100 ms 16 bit binary Annunciator device to be set Bit Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P S1 3 m 3 3 3 3 S2 3 Device Name D...

Страница 335: ...monitor Y005 Forward movement X000 FNC 46 ANS Forward end X001 Upper limit X002 Lower limit FNC 46 ANS X003 Continuous X004 Cycle FNC 46 ANS M8049 Y005 X005 Forward movement M8048 Annunciator ON Y006 Fault display X007 Reset FNC 47 ANRP END T 0 K 10 S900 T 1 K 20 S901 T 2 K100 S902 0 3 3 12 21 30 32 34 36 When M8049 turns ON monitoring becomes valid If the forward end detection input X000 does not...

Страница 336: ...ciators in the ON status are reset in turn in each operation cycle When ANRP instruction is used an annunciator in the ON status is reset only in one operation cycle only once Program example Refer to ANS FNC 46 instruction For a program example refer to Section 12 7 Operand type Description Data type There is no set data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specificatio...

Страница 337: ...quare root of the data stored in 1 is calculated and stored to 1 Caution 1 Operation result 1 The obtained square root is an integer because the decimal point is ignored When the calculated value is ignored M8021 borrow flag turns ON 2 When the calculated value is true 0 M8020 zero flag turns ON Program example Operand type Description Data type Word device number storing data whose square root is...

Страница 338: ... binary floating point real number It is not necessary to convert such a constant with the FLT instruction K and H cannot be specified in RAD DEG EXP and LOGE instructions Operand type Description Data type Data register number storing binary integer 16 or 32 bit binary Data register number storing binary floating point real number Real number binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others S...

Страница 339: ...eration D 21 D 20 Binary floating point operation 1 2 D 22 BIN D 25 D 24 Binary floating point operation 3 D 29 D 28 Binary floating point operation 5 D 27 D 26 Binary floating point operation 4 6 D 13 D 12 Scientific notation operation for monitoring D 15 D 14 32 bit binary integer 7 8 M8000 FNC 49 FLT D 0 D 20 FNC 19 BIN K2X010 D 22 FNC 49 FLT D 22 D 24 FNC 123 DEDIV D 20 D 24 D 28 FNC 122 DEMUL...

Страница 340: ...PLC FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 50 REF Refresh Section 13 1 51 REFF Refresh and filter adjust Section 13 2 52 MTR Input Matrix Section 13 3 53 HSCS High speed counter set Section 13 4 54 HSCR High speed counter reset Section 13 5 55 HSZ High speed counter zone compare Section 13 6 56 SPD Speed Detection Section 13 7 57 PLSY Pulse Y Output Section 13 8 58 PWM Pulse Width Modulation Se...

Страница 341: ...X010 or X020 Up to the final input number whose least significant digit number is 0 S2 Y000 Y010 or Y020 Up to the final output number whose least significant digit number is 0 S3 FX3U FX3UC PLCs K8 H8 or K16 H10 Up to K256 H100 which is a multiple of 8 FX3G PLC K8 H8 or K16 H10 Up to K128 H80 which is a multiple of 8 Operand Type Description Data Type Head bit device X or Y number to be refreshed...

Страница 342: ...put image memory turns ON when the instruction is executed In X000 to X017 1 the response delay time of the input filter can be changed 1 X000 to X007 in the FX3G FX3U 16M and FX3UC 16M For details refer to 13 1 1 What should be understood before using the REF instruction D Head device number Number of points K8 H8 or K16 H10 Up to K256 H100 which is a multiple of 8 Y000 Y010 or Y020 Up to the fin...

Страница 343: ...r of refreshed points n Set a multiple of 8 such as K8 H8 K16 H10 K256 H100 Any other numeric value causes an error 2 Setting the head device number D Make sure that the least significant digit number is 0 such as X000 X010 X020 or Y000 Y010 Y020 Program examples 1 When refreshing inputs Only X010 to X017 8 points in total are refreshed 2 When refreshing outputs Y000 to Y007 Y010 to Y017 and Y020 ...

Страница 344: ... less load current 10 mA or more 5 to 24V DC Y003 and higher 0 2ms or less load current 100 mA 24V DC b FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC Y000 Y001 Y002 and Y003 5μs or less load current 10 mA or more 5 to 24V DC Y004 and higher 0 2ms or less load current 100 mA 24V DC c FX3G PLC 14 point and 24 point type Y000 and Y001 5μs or less load current 10 mA or more 5 to 24V DC Y002 and higher 0 2ms or less load curren...

Страница 345: ...ation REFF and REFFP 16 inputs from X000 to X017 1 in the image memory are refreshed at the digital input filter time n 1 ms When the input turns ON n 1 ms before the instruction is executed the image memory is set to ON When the input turns OFF n 1 ms before the instruction is executed the image memory is set to OFF When the command input is ON the REFF instruction is executed in each operation c...

Страница 346: ...1 W or more to the input terminal and make sure that the load current in the open collector transistor output of the external equipment is 20 mA or more including the input current of the main unit 3 The filter time is fixed to 10 ms in X010 to X017 when the FX3U 16M FX3UC 16M is used Program example 1 Relationship between the program and the filter time 4 X000 to X007 in the FX3U 16M FX3UC 16M In...

Страница 347: ...to X017 2 is set in special data register D8020 By changing this value using the MOV instruction etc the input filter value for X000 to X017 2 which is used during execution of the END instruction can be changed 2 X000 to X007 in the FX3U 16M FX3UC 16M 3 This function is supported only in DC input type 2 Instruction in which the digital filter is automatically changed Regardless of the change in t...

Страница 348: ...inal input device number Only 0 is allowed in the least significant digit of device numbers Bit Head device Y number of matrix signal output Y000 Y010 Y020 final output device number Only 0 is allowed in the least significant digit of device numbers Bit Head bit device Y M or S number of ON output destination Y000 Y010 Y020 final Y number M000 M010 M020 final M number or S000 S010 S020 final S num...

Страница 349: ...s 1 Eight input points are occupied from the input device number specified in 2 n output points are occupied from the output device number specified in When specifying the output in make sure that n output numbers specified in does not overlap the output specified in 2 Limitation in the number of instructions The MTR instruction can be used only once in a program 3 Wiring One diode of 0 1 A 50 V i...

Страница 350: ... to the following manuals of the PLC used FX3G Hardware Edition FX3U Hardware Edition FX3UC Hardware Edition X021 M 51 X022 M 52 X023 M 53 X024 M 54 X025 M 55 X026 M 56 X027 M 57 M 50 M 40 COM Y020Y021Y022Y023Y024Y025Y026Y027 S S X020X021X022X023X024X025X026X027 X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027 M 41 M 42 M 43 M 44 M 45 M 46 M 47 M 31 M 32 M 33 M 34 M 35 M 36 M 37 M 30 Diode 0 1A 50V 2nd column 1...

Страница 351: ...y is high however erroneous input pulses may be counted To prevent erroneous input pulses connect pull up resistors 3 3 kΩ 0 5 W to transistor outputs used in MTR instruction For pull up resistors use the power supply shown in the table below The figure below shows an example of the FX3U Series main unit sink input sink output 1 X000 to X007 in the FX3G FX3U 16M and FX3UC 16M 3 ON OFF duration of ...

Страница 352: ...5 specified in becomes the comparison value 1 for example when the current value changes from 199 to 200 or from 201 to 200 if the comparison value is K200 the bit device is set to ON regardless of the operation cycle This instruction is executed after the counting processing in the high speed counter Operand Type Description Data Type Data to be compared with the current data value of a high spee...

Страница 353: ...cy and total frequency of each counter are affected Refer to the counting operation described below and select according to the contents of control whether to use HSCS instruction or general purpose comparison instruction a Case to select DHSCS instruction When the output should be given when the counting result becomes equivalent to the comparison value regardless of the scan time of the PLC b Ca...

Страница 354: ...be specified as 3 Only 32 bit operation instructions are available Because instructions for high speed counters are dedicated to 32 bits make sure to input DHSCS FNC 53 4 Priority order in operation among HSCS FNC 53 HSCR FNC 54 and HSZ FNC 55 instructions for the same high speed counter For details refer to 6 Priority order in operations among HSCS FNC 53 HSCR FNC 54 and HSZ FNC 55 instructions f...

Страница 355: ...instruction is used in FX3U FX3UC PLCs the maximum response frequency and total frequency of every software counter are limited When the DHSCS DHSCR or DHSZ instruction is used in FX3G PLCs the total frequency of high speed counters is limited For the maximum response frequency and total frequency in FX3U FX3UC PLCs refer to Subsection 4 7 10 For the total frequency in FX3G PLCs refer to Subsectio...

Страница 356: ...eration by an external terminal M8025 1 HSC external reset mode For a high speed counter equipped with an external reset terminal R such as C241 an instruction is executed and the comparison result is output at the rising edge of the reset input signal In FX3G PLCs high speed counters operate in the HSC external reset mode regardless of the status of M8025 1 Program If an instruction for the high ...

Страница 357: ...rder of programming 1 Only FX3G PLCs support the DHSZ instruction Operation of FX3G FX2N FX2NC FX1N FX1NC FX1S PLC reference 1 Due to the response delay at the output the output may not operate within the short time before the counter s present value is reset to 0 Program sequence Processing sequence FX3U FX3UC FX2N FX2NC FX3G FX1N FX1S FX1NC DHSCS 1 DHSCR 6 self reset DHSCS 1 DHSCS 1 DHSCS 2 DHSZ...

Страница 358: ...his instruction the comparison processing is executed after the counting processing in the high speed counter Operation When the present value of the high speed counter C255 changes counts from 99 to 100 or from 101 to 100 Y010 is reset output refresh Operand Type Description Data Type Data to be compared with the current value of a high speed counter or word device number storing the data to be c...

Страница 359: ... the scan time of the PLC b Cases to select a general purpose comparison instruction When the frequency is beyond the counting performance of software counters and below the counting performance of hardware counters When counting is important but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in operations depending on the counting result When the number in an instruction is more than 32 2 FX3G PLCs W...

Страница 360: ...HSCS FNC 53 HSCR FNC 54 and HSZ FNC 55 instructions for the same high speed counter in Subsection 13 4 1 4 Reset operation by an external terminal For details refer to 5 Reset operation by an external terminal M8025 1 HSC external reset mode in Subsection 13 4 1 5 Other cautions on using HSCR instruction For details refer Subsection 13 4 1 Program example 1 Example of self reset circuit When the c...

Страница 361: ... comparison value 2 Based on the comparison result smaller than the lower comparison value inside the comparison zone or larger than the upper comparison value one among 1 and 2 is set to ON regardless of the operation cycle In this instruction the comparison processing is executed after the count processing in the high speed counter Operand Type Description Data Type Data to be compared with the ...

Страница 362: ...arison pattern Current value of C251 Change of output contact Y Y000 Y001 Y002 1000 ON OFF OFF 999 1000 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 999 1000 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 999 1000 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 999 1000 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 1000 2000 OFF ON OFF 2000 2001 OFF ON OFF OFF ON 2000 2001 OFF OFF ON ON OFF 2000 2001 OFF ON OFF OFF ON 2000 2001 OFF OFF ON ON OFF 2000 OFF OFF ON Instruction FNC No Instruction name DHSCS FNC 53...

Страница 363: ...e regardless of the scan time of the PLC b Cases to select a general purpose comparison instruction When the frequency is beyond the counting performance of software counters and below the counting performance of hardware counters When counting is important but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in operations depending on the counting result When the number in an instruction is more than 3...

Страница 364: ... soon as the current value of C235 changes from 999 to 1000 or from 1999 to 2000 2 Because the comparison result cannot be obtained when restoring the power or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN the result is not output even if the comparison condition is provided For details refer to 13 6 1 Program in which comparison result is set to ON when power is turned ON ZCP FNC 11 instruction 6 P...

Страница 365: ...ogram example shown below Explanation of operation The outputs Y010 to Y012 are as shown below Program example Timing chart In the part 1 in the timing chart Y010 remains OFF if the current value of a high speed counter C235 in the example below is 0 when restoring the power 1 For initializing Y010 the current value of C235 is compared with K1000 and K1200 and Y010 is driven using the DZCPP instru...

Страница 366: ...al Basic Applied Instruction Edition 13 High Speed Processing FNC 50 to FNC 59 13 6 FNC 55 HSZ High Speed Counter Zone Compare input pulse for C235 X000 smaller than zone X010 inside zone Y010 larger than zone Y011 present value of counter 0 1000 1200 Y012 Start A B C 1 ...

Страница 367: ...mber for the comparison table as Because one line in the comparison table uses four devices 4 devices are occupied from 2 Specify the number of lines in the comparison table as The created table starts from the head register and has the number of lines specified in 3 Comparison data Make sure that the comparison data is 32 bits 4 Output Y number Specify each digit of the Y number in hexadecimal fo...

Страница 368: ...1 D214 FNC 12 MOV K0 D215 FNC 12 DMOV K567 D216 FNC 12 MOV H11 D218 FNC 12 MOV K1 D219 C251 K2 147 483 647 C251 FNC 55 DHSZ D200 K5 M8130 RST C251 RST Y011 Comparison data Output Y number Output is set or reset K1 Output is set Comparison data Output Y number Output is set or reset K0 Output is reset Comparison data Output Y number Output is set or reset K1 Output is set Comparison data Output Y n...

Страница 369: ... flag M8131 turns ON 6 When the command contact is set to OFF execution of the instruction is stopped and the table counter D8130 is reset to 0 Cautions 1 Limitation in the number of DHSZ instructions This instruction can be programmed only once in a program With regard to the DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ and DHSCT instructions used for other purposes up to 32 instructions including the DHSZ instruction can b...

Страница 370: ... can be specified as and a constant K or H can be specified as The available range is limited to 1 K H 128 A high speed counter C235 to C255 can be specified as This function is different from the zone comparison described above PLSY instruction is as shown on the next page and only the pulse output can be changed by users 1 Control example Example of table configuration and data setting Compariso...

Страница 371: ...oating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control FNC 55 DHSZ M8132 PLS M10 S S1 S2 Y000 FNC 57 DPLSY D8132 K0 Frequency Pulse quantity K0 specifies continuous output Pulse output M10 FNC 12 DMOVP K20 D300 FNC 12 DMOVP K300 D302 FNC 12 DMOVP K600 D304 FNC 12 DMOVP K500 D306 FNC 12 DMOVP K700 D308 FNC 12 DMOVP K200 D310 FNC 12 DMOVP K800 D312 FNC 12 DMOVP K100 D314...

Страница 372: ...SZ instruction becomes valid after that 8 Accordingly the contact of PLS M10 is used so that the PLSY instruction is executed from the second scan after the command input has been set to ON Data can be written to the table in a program as shown in this example or directly using keys in peripheral equipment 1 M8132 This is the special auxiliary relay for declaring the frequency control mode 2 D8132...

Страница 373: ...f this instruction varies depending on the version 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices S1 X000 to X007 can be specified S2 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Operand Type Description Data Type Device number of pulse input X Bit Time data ms or word device number storing the data 16 or 32 bit binary Head word device number storing the pulse density data 16 or 32 bit...

Страница 374: ...ortional to the rotation speed 1 Timing chart 2 The measured value is in proportion to the number of rotations as shown below S1 S2 D D D D FNC 56 SPD S1 D S2 Command input Measured value The command contact is set to ON Command input S1 D 1 counts OFF ON operation of ms later the counting result is stored to Accompanied by this operation 1 is reset and then counting of the OFF ON operation of is ...

Страница 375: ... remaining time is stored in 5 4 ms By repeating this operation the measured value 1 will store the pulse density which is proportional to the rotation speed 1 Timing chart 2 The measured value 1 is in proportion to the number of rotations as shown below S1 S2 S2 D D D D D D D D FNC 56 DSPD S1 D S2 Command input Command input Measured value ms S1 Current value ms Remaining time ms The command cont...

Страница 376: ...ent is 20 mA or more FX3G PLCs 2 Occupied devices 1 When using the 16 bit operation Three devices are occupied from a device specified in 2 2 When using the 32 bit operation Six devices are occupied from a device specified in 2 2 The value is updated by interrupt processing from the CPU not every scan time operation cycle of the PLC 3 When a word device is specified as If the word device value is ...

Страница 377: ...ed only to FX3U PLC Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation PLSY A pulse train of frequency is output in the quantity from the output Y Specify the frequency in Allowable setting range 1 to 32767 Hz Specify the generated pulse quantity in Allowable setting range 1 to 32767 PLS Specify the output Y number from which pulses are to be output in Allowable setting range Y000 Y001 Opera...

Страница 378: ...truction execution complete flag M8029 used for PLSY instruction can be used also for other instructions When using other instructions setting the M8029 flag to ON or OFF or using two or more PLSY instructions make sure to use each M8029 flag just after an instruction to be monitored For the instruction execution complete flag use method refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Device Name Description M8029 Inst...

Страница 379: ...cordingly When the data in is changed the change new value becomes valid the next time the instruction is driven 2 Frequency When using transistor outputs in the main unit set the output frequency to 100 000 Hz or less If the load is operated using pulses at a frequency higher than 100 000 Hz the PLC may be damaged 3 Pulse output Only a transistor output on the main unit or Y000 or Y001 on a speci...

Страница 380: ...signed as shown in the table below Only wire the appropriate output terminals Outputs in special high speed output adapters and the main unit operate as shown below Assignment of output numbers in special high speed output adapters Output operation Pulse output destination Output affecting operation Operation Y000 Y004 While Y004 is ON pulses are output from Y000 in the high speed output adapter W...

Страница 381: ...not be executed While a pulse output monitor flag is ON even after the instruction drive contact is set to OFF a pulse output instruction or positioning instruction for the same output relay cannot be executed Before executing such an instruction wait until the pulse output monitor flag turns OFF and one or more operation cycles pass 3 Frequency control mode in which DHSZ FNC 55 and PLSY FNC 57 in...

Страница 382: ...ON pulse width is ms are output in periods of ms Specify the pulse width t in Allowable setting range 0 to 32767 ms Specify the period T0 in Allowable setting range 1 to 32767 ms Specify the output Y number from which pulses are to be output in Allowable setting range Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003 Operand Type Description Data Type Output pulse width ms 16 bit binary Period ms 16 bit binary Device number Y ...

Страница 383: ...is set to OFF a pulse output or positioning instruction for the same output relay cannot be executed Before executing a pulse output or positioning instruction wait until the pulse output monitor flag turns OFF and one or more operation cycles pass 3 Cautions on using special high speed output adapters 1 Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers 2 Set the puls...

Страница 384: ...should be considerably larger than the pulse cycle T0 The ripple value Δe in the mean output current e is approximately Δe e T0 τ Setting status of output form setting switch Signal name Setting name in each positioning instruction Output number 1st unit 2nd unit 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis FPxRP side Forward rotation pulse chain FP Pulse output destination Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003 Reverse rota...

Страница 385: ... frequency Hz Allowable setting range 10 to 32767 Hz Total number of output pulses PLS Allowable setting range FX3G 110 to 32767 PLS FX3U X3UC 1 to 32767 PLS Acceleration deceleration time ms Allowable setting range 50 to 5000 ms Pulse output number Allowable setting range Y000 Y001 Operand Type Description Data Type Maximum frequency Hz 16 or 32 bit binary Total number of output pulses PLS 16 or ...

Страница 386: ...t specifications Simple positioning with the acceleration deceleration function The operation pattern is as shown below Output processing The pulse output is controlled by the dedicated hardware regardless of the operation cycle Data change while the instruction is executed Even if operands are overwritten while the instruction is executed such changes are not reflected immediately The changes bec...

Страница 387: ...oad is operated using pulses at a frequency higher than 100 000 Hz from transistor outputs in the main unit the PLC may be damaged 2 Pulse output Only a transistor output on the main unit or Y000 or Y001 on a special high speed output adapter 1 can be specified in 1 High speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC When using the PLSR FNC 59 instruction with a relay output type ...

Страница 388: ... unit are assigned as shown in the table below Only wire the appropriate output terminals Outputs in special high speed output adapters and the main unit operate as shown below Assignment of output numbers in special high speed output adapter Output operation Item Description Operating voltage range 5 to 24V DC Operating current range 10 to 100 mA Output frequency 100 kHz or less Pulse output dest...

Страница 389: ...0 or Y001 in several instructions While a pulse output monitor BUSY READY flag is ON a pulse output or positioning instruction for the same output relay cannot be executed While a pulse output monitor flag is ON even after the instruction drive contact is set to OFF a pulse output or positioning instruction for the same output relay cannot be executed Before executing a pulse output or positioning...

Страница 390: ...ce 60 IST Initial State Section 14 1 61 SER Search a Data Stack Section 14 2 62 ABSD Absolute drum sequencer Section 14 3 63 INCD Incremental drum sequencer Section 14 4 64 TTMR Teaching Timer Section 14 5 65 STMR Special Timer Section 14 6 66 ALT Alternate State Section 14 7 67 RAMP Ramp Variable Value Section 14 8 68 ROTC Rotary Table Control Section 14 9 69 SORT SORT Tabulated Data Section 14 1...

Страница 391: ...below it is necessary to set X020 to X024 as rotary switches so that they do not turn ON at the same time It is not necessary to wire unused switches but they cannot be used for any other purpose because they are occupied by IST instruction Specify the smallest device number of practical state relays in for the automatic mode Specify the largest device number of practical state relays in for the a...

Страница 392: ...use all switches for mode selection When some switches are not used leave the corresponding numbers in the unused status Such numbers cannot be used for any other purpose 2 Programming order of the IST instruction and STL instruction The IST instruction should be programmed earlier than a series of STL circuit such as state relays S0 to S2 3 State relays used for the zero return operation Use the ...

Страница 393: ... operation X023 Cycle operation X024 Continuous operation Transfer start X026 Automatic start X026 Automatic start X020 Individual operation Start pulse X025 Zero return start M8042 X020 M8040 Individual operation STL transfer disable X021 Zero return X027 M8042 Start pulse Stop X022Stepping operation X023Cycle operation X027Stop M8002 Initial pulse M8040 Self holding M8000 M8047 RUN monitor Enabl...

Страница 394: ...y When the start button is pressed after that the machine performs the continuous operation from the last position and automatically stops at the zero point Continuous operation mode When the start button is pressed while the machine is located at the zero point the machine starts continuous operation When the stop button is pressed the machine finishes the current cycle until the zero point and t...

Страница 395: ...e specification X030 M 0 Individual operation mode X035 M 1 Zero return operation mode X033 M 2 Stepping operation mode X040 M 3 Cycle operation mode X032 M 4 Continuous operation X034 M 5 Zero return start X026 M 6 Automatic mode start X041 M 7 Stop M 0 Does not operate X030 M 1 Zero return operation mode M 2 Does not operate M 3 X031 M 4 Continuous operation X032 M 5 Zero return start M 6 Automa...

Страница 396: ... Individual operation mode and zero return operation mode M8041 is not effective Stepping operation mode and cycle operation mode M8041 is effective only while the start button is pressed and held Continuous operation mode The operation is latched when the start button is pressed and cleared when the stop button is pressed c M8042 Start pulse M8042 is activated instantaneously only when the start ...

Страница 397: ...the automatic mode When the operation mode is switched between the individual operation mode zero return operation mode and automatic mode while the machine is operating all outputs are reset once to assure safety after which the following mode becomes valid While M8045 All output reset disable is ON outputs are not reset at all b Individual operation mode Programming is not required when the indi...

Страница 398: ...M8043 zero return complete to ON before starting the automatic mode Unclamping RST Y000 RST Y001 Zero return complete Y002 Moving down reset Leftward travel Rightward travel reset Moving up Zero return start RST Y003 Y004 SET M8043 S 12 Reset Make sure to use the state relays S10 to S19 for the zero return operation In the final state drive M8043 and then reset the final state Initial state for ze...

Страница 399: ...Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control d Automatic mode stepping operation mode cycle operation mode or continuous operation mode Y000 Moving down K 10 Clamping Moving up SET Y001 T 0 RET S 2 Initial state for automatic mode Y002 Y003 Rightward travel Moving down Y000 K 10 Moving up RST Y001 T 1 Y002 Y004 Leftward travel END Unclamping SFC block 20 21...

Страница 400: ...TL S 1 33 LD X 025 34 SET S 10 36 STL S 10 37 RST Y 001 38 RST Y 000 39 OUT Y 002 40 LD X 002 41 SET S 11 43 STL S 11 44 RST Y 003 45 OUT Y 004 46 LD X 004 47 SET S 12 49 STL S 12 50 SET M8043 52 LD M8043 53 RST S 12 RET 55 STL S 2 56 LD M8041 57 AND M8044 58 SET S 20 60 STL S 20 61 OUT Y 000 62 LD X001 63 SET S 21 65 STL S 21 66 SET Y 001 67 OUT T 0 SP K 10 70 LD T 0 71 SET S 22 73 STL S 22 74 OU...

Страница 401: ...cted Five devices starting from store the number of same data first position last position maximum value position and minimum value position In this case however 0 is stored in three devices starting from which store the number of same data first position and last position Operand type Description Data type Head device number in which same data maximum value and minimum value are searched 16 or 32...

Страница 402: ... 1 store the number of same data first position last position maximum value position and minimum value position In this case however 0 is stored in three devices starting from 1 which store the number of same data first position and last position Searched device Searched data value example Comparison data value example Data position Search result Maximum value 4 Same Minimum value 3 K100 K100 0 3 ...

Страница 403: ...of devices are occupied for storing the search result Make sure that such devices are not used in other controls for the machine 1 In the case of 16 bit operation Five devices 1 2 3 and 4 are occupied 2 In the case of 32 bit operation Ten devices 1 3 2 5 4 7 6 and 9 8 are occupied Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DSER D0...

Страница 404: ...devices and consecutive n outputs starting from are controlled to ON or OFF during one rotation Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing the data table with rising and faling point data 16 or 32 bit binary Counter number for monitoring the current value compared with the data table 16 or 32 bit binary Head bit device number to be output Bit n Number of lines in the table and t...

Страница 405: ...es 2 Output pattern When the command input is set to ON n points starting from change as shown below Each rising point falling point can be changed respectively by overwriting the data in to 2n 1 2 32 bit operation DABSD In this example outputs are controlled to ON or OFF by one rotation 0 to 360 using the rotation angle signal of 1 pulse The present value of the counter is compared with the data ...

Страница 406: ...ay caused by the scan cycle with regard to the current value of a counter When high responsitivity is required in FX3U FX3UC PLCs use the table high speed comparison function offered by the HSZ instruction or use the HSCT instruction 2 When specifying digits of a bit device as 1 Device number Specify a multiple of 16 0 16 32 64 2 Number of digits In ABSD instruction 16 bit operation Only K4 is ava...

Страница 407: ...ration 1 16 bit operation INCD The current value of a counter is compared with the data table having n lines starting from which occupies n lines x 1 device When is equivalent to the table data the current output is reset and the next output is set to ON In this way the ON OFF status of specified outputs is controlled in turn Operand type Description Data type Head word device number storing the s...

Страница 408: ...C1 and the current value of the counter C0 is reset 6 The current value is compared for up to n K4 outputs in the same way 1 n 64 7 When the final process specified by n is finished the execution complete flag M8029 turns ON and remains ON for one operation cycle M8029 is used for many instructions as the instruction execution complete flag Use M8029 as a contact just after a corresponding instruc...

Страница 409: ...y the magnification 10n and then transferred to The table below shows the actual value indicated by depending on the magnification n and the pressing and holding time t0 unit 1 sec Related instruction There is a handy instruction as follows Operand type Description Data type Device number storing the teaching data 16 bit binary n Magnification by which the teaching data is multiplied K0 to K2 H0 t...

Страница 410: ...pes of data registers Suppose that the set value is written to D400 to D409 in advance D1 D D1 D D1 D D1 D D1 D M8000 RUN monitor T 0 D 400 T 1 D 401 T 9 D 409 X010 Teaching button M 0 X010 FNC 19 BIN K1X000 Z FNC 64 TTMR D300 K 0 PLF M 0 FNC 12 MOV D300 D400Z 10 timers to be set Because the timers T0 to T9 are the 100 ms type the actual operating time sec is 1 10 of the teaching data Selecting a ...

Страница 411: ...ccording to the purpose while referring to the example shown below Off delay timer and one shot timer When T10 is set to and M0 is set to M0 Off delay timer which turns OFF with delay of the timer set value after the command contact turned OFF M1 1 One shot timer which turns ON after the command contact turned OFF from ON and turns OFF after the timer set value M2 2 Occupied and can be used for fl...

Страница 412: ...d in this instruction cannot be used in other general circuits such as OUT instruction If the timer number is used in other general circuits the timer malfunctions 2 Number of occupied devices Four devices are occupied from a device specified in Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine 3 When the command contact is set to OFF 1 and 3 will turn OFF after the set t...

Страница 413: ...tion and operation 1 16 bit operation ALT and ALTP Alternating output 1 step Every time the command input turns from OFF to ON a bit device specified in is alternated from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON Dividing output by 2 step alternating output Multi step dividing outputs are achieved by combination of two or more ALTP instructions Operand type Description Data type Bit device number whose output ...

Страница 414: ...ain the stop output Y000 is set to ON 2 Flicker operation 1 When the input X006 is set to ON the contact of the timer T2 turns ON instantaneously every 5 seconds 2 Every time the contact of T2 turns ON the output Y007 is set to ON or OFF alternately 3 Alternating output operation using auxiliary relays M operation equivalent to ALT instruction The circuit below is provided as an example of alterna...

Страница 415: ...top command can be output The number of scans 0 to n is stored in 1 The time from start to the end value is the operation cycle multiplied by n times If the command input is set to OFF in the middle of operation execution is paused The present data value stored in is held and the number of scans stored in 1 is cleared When the command input is set to ON again is cleared and the operation is starte...

Страница 416: ... changed as follows depending on the ON OFF status of the mode flag M8026 In FX3G PLCs the contents of are same as the case 2 When M8026 is ON below regardless of the ON OFF status of the mode flag M8026 1 When M8026 is OFF 2 When M8026 is ON Related devices For the instruction execution complete flag use method refer to Subsection 6 5 2 1 M8026 is available only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs and is cleared ...

Страница 417: ...efficient control of the rotary table for putting taking a product into out of the rotary table 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 3 Applicable devices S D b cannot be indexed with index registers V and Z Operand type Description Data type Data register for counting 16 bit binary m1 Number of divisions 16 bit binary m2 Number of low speed sections 16 bit binary Head bit device number to be driven Bit...

Страница 418: ... counting Set them in advance using a transfer instruction 1 Sets the port No to be called 2 Sets the product No to be called A phase signal Construct an internal contact circuit in advance which is driven by the input signal X 1 B phase signal 2 Zero point detection signal 3 Forward rotation at high speed 4 Forward rotation at low speed 5 Stop 6 Backward rotation at low speed 7 Backward rotation ...

Страница 419: ...f divisions m1 of the table and number of low speed sections m2 When the above conditions are specified forward backward rotation and high speed low speed stop are output to 3 to 7 specified by the head device Cautions 1 Operations caused by the command input ON OFF status When the command input is set to ON and this instruction is executed the result will be automatically output to 3 to 7 When th...

Страница 420: ...nding order based on the group data in the column No n and the result is stored in the data table sorting result having m1 m2 points from For operation examples refer to the next page Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing the data table which occupies m1 m2 points 16 bit binary m1 Number of data lines 1 to 32 m2 Number of group data columns 1 to 6 Head device number storing...

Страница 421: ...lag use method refer to Subsection 6 5 2 2 Operation examples When the instruction is executed with n K2 column No 2 and n K3 column No 3 for the following sorting source data the operations shown below are acquired It is recommended to put a serial number such as a control number in the first column so that the original line number can be estimated based on the contents Sorting source data 1 Sort...

Страница 422: ...g the instruction again set the command input to OFF Limitation in the number of instructions Only one instruction can be used in a program When the same device is specified in and The source data is overwritten by the data acquired by sorting Take special care so that the contents of are not changed until execution is completed Column No 1 2 3 4 Line No Control number Height Weight Age 1 5 10 15 ...

Страница 423: ...trols with a minimum required sequence program and external wiring they are similar to handy instructions described in the preceding chapter FROM and TO instructions essential for controlling special units and special blocks are included in this group In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs transfer can be also executed using a MOV instruction FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 70 TKY Ten Key Input Section ...

Страница 424: ...cant digit An input numeric value is stored in binary format When the ten keys are pressed in the order 1 2 3 4 in the figure shown on the next page 2130 is stored in Operand Type Description Data Type Head bit device number from which one of the ten keys is input 10 devices are occupied Bit Word device number storing the data 16 or 32 bit binary Head bit device number storing the key pressing inf...

Страница 425: ...eys Output informations for key pressing and key sensing are output to to 10 1 Input numeric value When an input value is larger than 99 999 999 it overflows from the most significant digit An input numeric value is stored in binary format 2 Key pressing information to 10 For the key pressing information to 9 turn ON or OFF according to the pressed keys For the key sensing output 10 turns ON when ...

Страница 426: ...according to input of the ten keys 0 to 9 10 Is ON while either one among 0 to 9 keys is pressed key sensing output 4 Limitation in the number of instructions The TKY or DTKY instruction can only be used once in a program When the TKY and or DTKY instruction need to be used two or more times use the indexing V Z function Program example In the program example shown below the input X000 is set as t...

Страница 427: ...49 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control 3 Timing chart 1 When the ten keys are pressed in the order 1 2 3 4 shown in the figure 2130 is stored in D0 When an input value is larger than 9999 it overflows from the most significant digit An input numeric value is stored in binary format in D0 2 When X002 is pressed M12 turns ON and remains ON until another key is pressed Other keys wo...

Страница 428: ...eric value is shifted into from the least significant byte and 7 turns ON When a key A to F is pressed the corresponding key press information bit to 5 turns ON and 6 turns ON Operand Type Description Data Type Head X device number to be used Four devices occupied Bit Head Y device number to be used Four devices occupied Bit Device number storing the numerical input from the 16 keys 16 or 32 bit b...

Страница 429: ...ON When a key A to F is pressed the corresponding key press information bit to 5 turns ON and 6 turns ON 1 Input of a numeric value through keys 0 to 9 When an input value is larger than 99 999 999 it overflows from the most significant digit The numeric value input is stored to 1 in binary The key sensing output 7 turns ON when any key 0 to 9 is pressed 2 Key pressing information for the keys A t...

Страница 430: ...ur devices are occupied from the head X device for connecting 16 keys 2 Four devices are occupied from the head Y device for connecting 16 keys 3 Eight devices are occupied from the head device for outputting the key pressing information Make sure that these devices are not used by other machine controls to 5 Key pressing information for the keys A to F 6 Key sensing output for the keys A to F 7 K...

Страница 431: ... O Device 16 FNC80 FNC89 External FX Device 17 FNC100 FNC109 Data Transfer 2 18 FNC110 FNC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Program example The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit sink input sink output For wiring details refer to the following manual FX3U Hardware Edition FX3UC Hardware Edition X004 FNC 71 HKY X000 Y00...

Страница 432: ... to 9999 up to 4 digits can be read A numeric value is stored in binary format The first set is stored to and the second set is stored to 1 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device X number connected to a digital switch Four devices are occupied Bit Head device Y number to which the strobe signal is output Four devices are occupied Bit Device number storing the numeric value of a digital swi...

Страница 433: ...ts of do not change all of to 3 turn OFF 2 Number of occupied devices 1 When two sets of 4 digits n K2 are used two devices are occupied starting from 2 When one set of 4 digits is used four devices are occupied starting from When two sets of 4 digits are used eight devices are occupied starting from 3 When connecting a digital switch of up to 3 digits It is not necessary to wire the strobe signal...

Страница 434: ... output type PLC When the push button switch X000 is pressed DSW FNC 72 instruction executes a series of operations Accordingly with regard to this program it is not necessary to consider the relay contact life even if Y010 to Y013 are relay outputs 1 While M0 digital switch read input is ON DSW FNC 72 is driven 2 DSW FNC 72 completes one cycle of operation and remains driven until the execution c...

Страница 435: ...able devices Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation SEGD and SEGDP 0 to F hexadecimal numbers in low order 4 bits 1 digit of are decoded to data for the seven segment display unit and stored in the low order 8 bits of Operand Type Description Data Type Head word device to be decoded 16 bit binary Word device number storing the data to be displayed in the seven segment display uni...

Страница 436: ...exadeci mal num ber b3 b2 b1 b0 B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 3 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 6 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 7 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 8 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 A 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 B 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 C 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1...

Страница 437: ...even segment display unit with the BCD decoder by the time division method When using one set of 4 digits n K0 to K3 For selection of n refer to Subsection 15 5 2 1 Data and strobe signal A 4 digit numeric value stored in is converted from binary into BCD and each digit is output in turn from to 3 by the time division method The strobe signal is output in turn from 4 to 7 by the time division meth...

Страница 438: ...segment display unit b 2nd set of 4 digits A 4 digit numeric value stored in 1 is converted from binary into BCD and its each digit is output in turn from 10 to 13 by the time division method The strobe signal is output in turn from 4 to 7 by the time division method also to latch the second set of 4 digit seven segment display unit The strobe signal outputs 4 to 7 are shared by the 1st and 2nd se...

Страница 439: ...an operation the operation is paused When the command contact is set to ON again the operation is started from the beginning 3 Number of occupied devices When one set of 4 digits is used 1 device is occupied from the head device specified in 8 devices are occupied from the head device specified in Even if the number of digits is smaller than 4 unused devices cannot be used for any other purpose Wh...

Страница 440: ...nt display Select n as described below The check column is provided at the bottom of the table Check a corresponding type of logic positive or negative and utilize it for parameter setting 1 Role of the parameter n The parameter n should be determined according to the data input logic positive or negative of the seven segment display unit the logic positive or negative of the strobe signal and the...

Страница 441: ...tput Negative logic Source output Positive logic 2 Seven segment display unit Data input Negative logic Strobe signal Positive logic Logic Negative logic Positive logic Timing chart Description BCD data at low level BCD data at high level Check Logic Negative logic Positive logic Timing chart Description Data latched at low level is held Data latched at high level is held Check PLC output logic Da...

Страница 442: ... 0 to 9999 but the value is expressed in the BCD format in the explanation below for convenience When the command input is set to ON the ARWS instruction executes the following operation Operand Type Description Data Type Head bit device number to be input Bit Word device number storing data converted into BCD 16 bit binary Head bit device Y number connected to seven segment display unit Bit n Num...

Страница 443: ...3 Operation of the LED for displaying a selected digit 4 to 7 A specified digit can be displayed by the LED offered by the strobe signals 4 to 7 4 Operation of the switches for changing data in each digit and 1 In a digit specified by a digit selection switch described above data is changed as follows When the increment input turns ON Every time the increment switch is pressed the contents of chan...

Страница 444: ...d devices 1 Four input devices are occupied starting from 2 Eight output devices are occupied starting from 5 Limitation in the number of the instruction ARWS instruction can only be used once in a program When ARWS instruction should be used two or more times use the indexing V Z function Program example 1 When changing the timer number and displaying the current value 1 Specifying the timer numb...

Страница 445: ...9 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Program M8000 T0 D300 T1 D301 T99 D399 Practical timer circuit X000 M0 Decrement X001 M1 Increment X002 M2 Higher digit RUN monitor M3 Lower digit X004 FNC 66 ALTP M100 Read write M100 Y014 Read indication M100 Y015 Write indication Y014 X003 FNC 72 DSW X010 Y010 Z K1 Read Set Digital switch Z 4 digits 1 set Y014 FNC 74 SEGL T0Z...

Страница 446: ...Z 0 to 9 and symbols but cannot handle regular width characters A character string is entered when a program is created with a programming tool stores converted ASCII codes in the order of low order 8 bits and high order 8 bits by 2 characters byte at one time Operand Type Description Data Type Eight half width alphanumeric characters input from a personal computer Character string only ASCII code...

Страница 447: ...s as the number of characters divided by 2 The decimal point is rounded up 2 While the extension function is ON occupies as many devices as the number of characters in the character string 2 When using RS FNC 80 ASCI FNC 82 HEX FNC 83 and or CCD FNC 84 instructions The extension function flag M8161 is also used for other instructions When using an instruction described above and the ASC instructio...

Страница 448: ...and 7 handles high order bits 8 Strobe signal 9 Execution flag which operates as shown in the above timing chart Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing ASCII code data Character string only ASCII codes Head output Y number to which ASCII code data is output Bit Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con st...

Страница 449: ... is supposed that data to be displayed is stored in hexadecimal codes in D300 to D307 1 Program 2 Connection example of the external display unit A6FD 1 The PLC shown in the example below is the FX2N 16EYT sink output connected to the FX3U 32M 1 A6FD was distributed only inside Japan however production of the external display unit A6FD was terminated in November 2002 3 Timing chart while M8027 is ...

Страница 450: ... OFF 2 Relationship with the scan time operation cycle This instruction is executed in synchronization with the scan time If the scan time is short the constant scan mode can be used If the scan mode is too long the timer interrupt function can be used 3 Output type of the PLC Use a transistor output type PLC 4 When 00H NULL code is contained in the data while M8027 is ON The instruction is execut...

Страница 451: ...n items between FROM instruction and TO instruction refer to Subsection 15 9 1 Special extension unit block BFM PLC word device n point 16 bit data starting from the buffer memory BFM m2 inside a special extension unit block No m1 are transferred read to n point 16 bit data starting from inside a PLC Operand Type Description Data Type m1 Unit number of a special extension unit block K0 to K7 from ...

Страница 452: ...e 32 bit operation instruction specify K1 to K8 Note that the 32 bit values m1 1 1 m2 1 m2 and n 1 n are valid when D or R is specified as m1 m2 or n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DFROM D0 D2 D100 R0 m1 is D1 D0 m2 is D3 D2 and n is R1 R0 Device Name Description M8028 Enable interrupt flag Disables or enables interrupts while FROM TO instruction is executed For details refer to Acceptance...

Страница 453: ...digit specification using the FROM instruction and direct specification of buffer memories 1 1 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Example When the BFM 4 abnormal station information in the CC Link LT master unit whose unit number is fixed to 0 built in the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 is read to D0 In case of FROM instruction In case of MOV instruction Example When the BFMs 0 to 3 remote statio...

Страница 454: ...mber m2 Up to 32767 16 bit RAM memories are built into a special extension unit block and they are called buffer memories Buffer memory numbers range from 0 to 32766 and their contents vary depending on the function of the extension equipment Setting range K0 to K32766 When BFMs are handled in a 32 bit instruction a specified BFM stores low order 16 bits and a consecutive BFM stores high order 16 ...

Страница 455: ...hen a large number of special extension equipment such as positioning units cam switches link units and analog units are connected considerable time may be required to initialize buffer memories when the PLC mode is set to RUN the operation time may be long and a watchdog timer error may occur 2 When many FROM TO instructions are driven at the same time When many FROM TO instructions are driven at...

Страница 456: ... written to n point buffer memories starting from the buffer memory BFM m2 inside a special extension unit block No m1 Operand Type Description Data Type m1 Unit number of a special extension unit block K0 to K7 from the right side of the main unit 16 or 32 bit binary m2 Transfer destination buffer memory BFM number 16 or 32 bit binary Device number storing the transfer source data 16 or 32 bit bi...

Страница 457: ...ion In the case of DTO D0 D2 D100 R0 m1 is D1 D0 m2 is D3 D2 and n is R1 R0 Program examples In programs the contents of data registers D extension registers R auxiliary relays M with digit specification and constants K and H are written transferred to buffer memories BFMs in special extension units blocks using the TO instruction and direct specification of buffer memories 1 1 This function is su...

Страница 458: ...in this group FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 80 RS Serial Communication Section 16 1 81 PRUN Parallel Run Octal Mode Section 16 2 82 ASCI Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion Section 16 3 83 HEX ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Section 16 4 84 CCD Check Code Section 16 5 85 VRRD Volume Read Section 16 6 86 VRSC Volume Scale Section 16 7 87 RS2 Serial Communication 2 Section 16 8 88 PID PID Co...

Страница 459: ...This instruction sends and receives data in non protocol communication by way of serial ports in accordance with RS 232C or RS 485 provided in the main unit For detailed explanation refer to the Data Communication Edition manual Operand type Description Data type Head device of data registers storing data to be sent 16 bit binary or character string m Number of bytes of data to be sent setting ran...

Страница 460: ... communication error 1 D8063 1 Error code number of serial communication error M8121 2 Sending wait flag D8120 3 Communication format setting M8122 2 Sending request D8122 4 Remaining amount of data to be sent M8123 2 Receiving complete flag D8123 4 Amount of data already received M8124 Carrier detection flag D8124 Header M8129 Time out check flag D8125 Terminator M8161 4 8 bit processing mode D81...

Страница 461: ... 0 3 Applicable devices Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation PRUN and PRUNP Octal bit device Decimal bit device Operand type Description Data type Digit specification 1 16 or 32 bit binary Device number of transfer destination 1 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number ...

Страница 462: ... Y2 Y1 Y0 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 M17 M16 M10 Decimal bit device M Not transferred M0 to M7 M10 to M17 Y0 to Y17 Command input FNC 81 DPRUN K6X000 K6M0 S D X000 to X027 M0 to M7 M10 to M17 M20 to M27 Octal bit device X X27 X20 X17 X10 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0 M19 M18 M17 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 M27 M18 and M19 do not change Decimal bit device M M10 M20 Command input ...

Страница 463: ... function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation ASCI and ASCIP n hexadecimal code characters digits stored in and later are converted into ASCII code and then stored to the devices and later The 16 bit mode and 8 bit mode options are available for this instruction For operation in each mode refer to the proceeding pages Operand type Descripti...

Страница 464: ...rsion is executed as follows Devices after D100 0ABCH D101 1234H D102 5678H Number of specified digits characters and conversion result Bit configuration in the case of n K4 When outputting data in the BCD format for a printer for example it is necessary to convert binary data into BCD data before executing this instruction n K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 Low order 8 bits of D200 C B A 0 4 3 2 1 8 Hi...

Страница 465: ...sing the 8 bit mode set M8161 to normally ON M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP Operation In the following program conversion is executed as follows Devices after D100 0ABCH D101 1234H D102 5678H Number of specified digits characters and conversion result Bit configuration in the case of n K2 When outputting data in the BCD format for a printer for example it is necessa...

Страница 466: ...CII codes stored in and later n characters are converted into hexadecimal codes and then stored to the devices and later The 16 bit mode and 8 bit mode are available for this instruction For operation in each mode refer to the proceeding pages Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing ASCII code to be converted Character string only ASCII code 1 Head device number storing conve...

Страница 467: ... RUN to STOP Operation In the following program conversion is executed as follows Conversion source data Number of specified characters and conversion result indicates 0 When the input data is in BCD format it is necessary to convert BCD data into binary data after executing this instruction If ASCII code is not stored in in the HEX instruction an operation error occurs and conversion into hexadec...

Страница 468: ...C mode is changed from RUN to STOP Operation In the following program conversion is executed as follows Conversion source data Number of specified characters and conversion result indicates 0 When the input data is in BCD format it is necessary to convert BCD data into binary data after executing this instruction ASCII code Hexadecimal code D 200 30H 0 D 201 41H A D 202 42H B D 203 43H C D 204 31H...

Страница 469: ...s function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation CCD and CCDP The addition data and horizontal parity value of data stored in to n 1 are calculated The addition data is stored to and the horizontal parity value is stored to 1 The 16 bit mode and 8 bit mode are available in this instruction For the operation in each mode refer to the proceedin...

Страница 470: ... following program conversion is executed as follows Example of data contents Low order 8 bits of D100 K100 01100100 High order 8 bits of D100 K111 0110111 1 Low order 8 bits of D101 K100 01100100 High order 8 bits of D101 K 98 01100010 Low order 8 bits of D102 K123 0111101 1 High order 8 bits of D102 K 66 01000010 Low order 8 bits of D103 K100 01100100 High order 8 bits of D103 K 95 0101111 1 Low...

Страница 471: ...tored to and 1 respectively M8161 is also used for the RS ASCI HEX and CRC instructions When using the 8 bit mode set M8161 to normally ON M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP Example of 8 bit conversion In the following program conversion is executed as follows Example of data contents D 100 K100 01100100 D 101 K111 0110111 1 D 102 K100 01100100 D 103 K 98 01100010 D 104...

Страница 472: ...eter No 0 is converted into binary 8 bit data and the value ranging from 0 to 255 is transferred to D0 The value of D0 is used as the set value of a timer When a value larger than 255 is required as the set value of a timer the read value multiplied by a constant using the MUL FNC 22 instruction can be set indirectly as the timer constant Operand type Description Data type Volume number setting ra...

Страница 473: ...channel ch1 In this case the communication function using communication channel ch1 is not available when the VRRD or VRSC instruction is used In 40 point and 60 point type FX3G PLCs the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected only to the option connector 2 and occupies communication channel ch2 In this case the communication function using communication channel ch2 is not available w...

Страница 474: ...es not always correspond to the switching position of the variable analog potentiometer scale 0 to 10 This instruction converts into a binary value the scale value of a variable analog potentiometer specified in and transfers the converted binary value to Operand type Description Data type Volume number setting range 0 to 7 16 bit binary Device to which the read analog value is transferred 16 bit ...

Страница 475: ...er board can be connected to the option connector 1 and occupies communication channel ch1 In this case the communication function using communication channel ch1 is not available when the VRRD or VRSC instruction is used In 40 point and 60 point type FX3G PLCs the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected only to the option connector 2 and occupies communication channel ch2 In this cas...

Страница 476: ...with RS 232C or RS 485 provided in the main unit For detailed explanation refer to the Data Communication Edition Operand type Description Data type Head device of data registers storing data to be sent 16 bit binary or character string m Number of bytes of data to be sent setting range 0 to 4 096 16 bit binary Head device of data registers storing received data when receiving is completed 16 bit ...

Страница 477: ...tion flag D8373 D8403 D8423 Monitor for number of received data 2 M8405 M8425 Data Set Ready DSR Flag 3 D8405 D8425 Communication parameter display D8379 D8409 D8429 Time out time setting M8379 M8409 M8429 Time out check flag D8380 D8410 D8430 Header 1 2 D8381 D8411 D8431 Header 3 4 D8382 D8412 D8432 Terminator 1 2 D8383 D8413 D8433 Terminator 3 4 D8384 D8414 D8434 Receiving sum received data D838...

Страница 478: ...75 FLCRT FNC300 to FLSTRD FNC305 instruction for the same port When using a header and terminator set the data in the header and terminator to corresponding devices D before executing the RS2 instruction Do not change the values of the header and terminator while the RS2 instruction is being executed Function Changes According to Versions Compatible Versions Item Function Summary FX3G FX3U FX3UC V...

Страница 479: ...function and operation 1 16 bit operation PID When the target value measured value and parameters to 6 are set and a program is executed the operation result MV is stored to the output value at every sampling time Operand type Description Data type Data register number storing the target value SV 16 bit binary Data register number storing the measured value PV 16 bit binary Data register number st...

Страница 480: ...o tuning is finished the specified MV value is set 3 Auto tuning In the case of step response method Before driving PID instruction the user should set the initial output value During auto tuning PID instruction does not change the MV output 1 1 When auto tuning is not used the number of points is the same as the number in the step response method are occupied Set item Setting Value Remarks Sampli...

Страница 481: ...ntal alarm set value 0 to 32767 It is valid when bit 2 is set to 1 and bit 5 is set to 0 in 1 for the operation setting ACT Output lower limit set value 32768 to 32767 It is valid when bit 2 is set to 0 and bit 5 is set to 1 in 1 for the operation setting ACT 24 1 Alarm output bit0 0 Input variation incremental is not exceeded 1 Input variation incremental is exceeded It is valid when bit 1 is set...

Страница 482: ... and 5 are not all 0 Twenty five devices are occupied from the head device specified in Operation setting ACT When bits 1 2 and 5 are all 0 Twenty devices are occupied from the head device specified in 3 When specifying a device in the latched area backed up against power failure For the output value MV in the PID instruction specify a data register D outside the latched area Program example When ...

Страница 483: ...xternal FX Device 17 FNC100 FNC109 Data Transfer 2 18 FNC110 FNC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control 17 Data Transfer 2 FNC100 to FNC109 FNC100 to FNC109 provide instructions for executing complicated processing for fundamental applied instructions and for executing special processing FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 100 101 102 ZPUSH B...

Страница 484: ...ch stored data use the ZPOP FNC103 instruction Use the ZPUSH FNC102 and ZPOP FNC103 instruction as a pair 3 By specifying the same device to ZPUSH FNC102 and ZPOP FNC103 instructions can be used in the nest structure In this case the occupied points are incremented by 16 after every time the ZPUSH FNC102 instruction is executed Secure sufficient area for the number of the next structure in advance...

Страница 485: ...nts used after in ZPUSH FNC102 instruction exceeds the corresponding device range error code K6706 When the number of batch storage times stores a negative value while the ZPUSH FNC102 instruction is executed error code K6706 Instruction Description ZPOP FNC103 Restores the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 which were batch stored temporarily by the ZPUSH FNC102 instruction D When the nest str...

Страница 486: ...registers Z0 to Z7 and V0 to V7 before execution of subroutine program are batch stored in D0 and later when index registers are used in the subroutine after the pointer P0 X005 M8002 Label P 0 M8000 RUN monitor M8000 K 5 D 0 RST FNC102 ZPUSH D 0 END FNC103 ZPOP FNC 02 SRET FNC 12 MOVP X005 K10 FNC 12 MOVP X000 V0 Y000 FNC 06 FEND X000 FNC 01 CALL P 0 Program using index registers X006 K 5 FNC 12 ...

Страница 487: ...ex registers are restored the number of times of batch storage is decremented by 1 2 For temporarily batch storing the data use ZPUSH FNC102 instruction Use ZPUSH FNC102 and ZPOP FNC103 instruction as a pair Related instruction Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the number of times of batch storage D s...

Страница 488: ...17 EVAL Character String to Floating Point Conversion Section 18 5 118 EBCD Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion Section 18 6 119 EBIN Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion Section 18 7 120 EADD Floating Point Addition Section 18 8 121 ESUB Floating Point Subtraction Section 18 9 122 EMUL Floating Point Multiplication Section 18 10 123 EDIV Floating Point Division Section 18...

Страница 489: ...ation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control 129 INT Floating Point to Integer Conversion Section 18 17 130 SIN Floating Point Sine Section 18 18 131 COS Floating Point Cosine Section 18 19 132 TAN Floating Point Tangent Section 18 20 133 ASIN Floating Point Arc Sine Section 18 21 134 ACOS Floating Point Arc Cosine Section 18 22 135 ATAN Floating Point Arc Tangent Section 18 23 136 RAD Floating Po...

Страница 490: ...matically converted from binary into binary floating point real number when the instruction is executed Caution 1 Number of occupied devices Three devices are occupied from 1 and 2 Make sure that these devices are not used for any other purpose Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing binary floating point data to be compared Real number binary 1 Device number storing binary floati...

Страница 491: ... H is specified it is automatically converted from binary into binary floating point real number when the instruction is executed 3 Applicable devices S D b cannot be indexed with index registers V and Z Operand Type Description Data Type Data register number storing binary floating point data to be compared Real number binary 1 Data register number storing binary floating point data to be compare...

Страница 492: ...point when the instruction is executed Cautions 1 Number of occupied devices Three devices are occupied from 1 and 2 Make sure that these devices are not used for any other purpose 2 Comparison values 1 and 1 Make sure that two comparison values have the following relationship 1 1 In the case of 1 1 the value 1 is regarded as 1 value during comparison S1 S1 S2 S2 S S D D D S1 S1 S2 S2 S S Command ...

Страница 493: ...d to 1 A real number E can be directly specified as Program examples 1 In the program example shown below a real number stored in D11 and D10 is transferred to D1 and D0 when X007 turns ON 2 In the program shown below a real number 1 23 is transferred to D11 and D10 when X007 turns ON Operand Type Description Data Type Binary floating point data transfer source or device number storing data Real n...

Страница 494: ...l number can be directly specified as The data after conversion varies depending on the display specification stored in Operand Type Description Data Type Binary floating point data to be converted or device storing data Real number binary Head device number storing the display specification of a numeric value to be converted 16 bit binary Head device number storing converted character string Char...

Страница 495: ... and later as shown below For the sign 20H space is stored when the binary floating point data is positive and 2DH is stored when the data is negative If the decimal part of the binary floating point data cannot be accommodated in the number of digits of the decimal part low order digits of the decimal part are rounded Decimal point format Total number of digits Number of digits of decimal part Si...

Страница 496: ...al part 7 1 2 3 Low order digits of decimal part 0 Decimal point format 8 Total number of digits 2 Number of digits of decimal part 1 2 Total number of digits Automatically added 1 1 23456 S1 S1 S2 S2 S2 1 2 3 Low order digits of decimal part 0 8 2 1 2 Total number of digits 20H space is stored 1 1 23456 S1 S1 S2 S2 S2 Exponent format Total number of digits Number of digits of decimal part E Sign ...

Страница 497: ... digit 20H space is stored between the integer part and the sign If the decimal part of the binary floating point data cannot be accommodated in the number of digits of the decimal part low order digits of the decimal part are rounded When the number of digits of the decimal part is set to any value other than 0 2EH is automatically stored in specified number of digits of decimal part 1 th digit W...

Страница 498: ...lue other than 0 Total number of digits Number of digits of decimal part 3 In the case of exponent format When the number of digits of the decimal part is 0 Total number of digits 6 When the number of digits of the decimal part is any value other than 0 Total number of digits Number of digits of decimal part 7 When the number of digits of the decimal part specified by 2 is not located within the f...

Страница 499: ...In the program shown below the contents binary floating point data of R0 and R1 are converted according to the contents specified by R10 to R12 and then stored to D10 and later when X000 turns ON X000 FNC116 DESTRP R0 R10 END D0 Total number of digits 0 3 3 0 Space Number of digits of decimal part 0 7 3 R11 R1 R10 R12 Conversion format Total number of digits Number of digits of decimal part R0 0 0...

Страница 500: ... character string in either format can be converted into binary floating point data Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing character string data to be converted into binary floating point data Character string Head device number storing converted binary floating point data Real number binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System...

Страница 501: ...nt format When a character string to be converted into binary floating point specified by has 7 digits or more excluding the sign decimal point and exponent part the conversion result may contain rounding error a In the case of decimal point format 31H 1 b15 b8 b7 b0 1 2 3 4 30H 0 38H 8 32H 2 2DH 2EH 37H 7 31H 1 7 8 1 0 1 2 1 Binary floating point real number 1 07812 D S S S S S D 00H b15 b8 b7 b0...

Страница 502: ...H space or 30H 0 exists between numbers except the first 0 in a character string specified by 20H or 30H is ignored during conversion When 30H 0 exists between a number and E in a character string in the exponent format 30H is ignored during conversion A character string can consist of up to 24 characters 20H space and 30H 0 in a character string are counted as one character respectively b15 b8 b7...

Страница 503: ...s exist error code K6706 When 00H does not exist in the corresponding device range starting from error code K6706 When the number of characters after is 0 or more than 24 error code K6706 Program examples 1 In the program example shown below a character string stored in R0 and later is converted into binary floating point and stored to D0 and D1 when X000 turns ON Device Name Description Condition...

Страница 504: ...tion The absolute value of the conversion result is less than 2 126 The value of is the minimum value 2 126 of 32 bit real numbers and the borrow flag M8021 turns ON The absolute value of the conversion result is not less than 2128 The value of is the maximum value 2128 of 32 bit real numbers and the carry flag M8022 turns ON The conversion result is true 0 The mantissa part is 0 The zero flag M80...

Страница 505: ...edicated monitoring method it is converted into scientific notation so that monitoring can be easily executed by peripheral equipment GX Developer and GOT have the function to directly monitor and display binary floating point Operand Type Description Data Type Data register number storing binary floating point Real number binary Data register number storing converted scientific notation Real numb...

Страница 506: ...erted binary floating point Real number binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 P FNC 119 EBIN D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction DEBIN DEBINP Mnemonic Operation Condition 32 bit Ins...

Страница 507: ...9 External FX Device 17 FNC100 FNC109 Data Transfer 2 18 FNC110 FNC139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Program example By DEBIN instruction a numeric value containing the decimal point can be directly converted into binary floating point Example Converting 3 14 into binary floating point 3 14 314 10 2 scientific notation For program examples of...

Страница 508: ... Caution 1 When the same device is specified The same device number can be specified in 1 1 and 1 In this case note that the addition result changes in every operation cycle when the continuous operation type instruction DEADD is used Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing binary floating point data used in addition Real number binary 1 Word device number storing binary floa...

Страница 509: ...traction result in the binary floating point format is transferred to 1 When a constant K or H is specified as 1 or 1 it is automatically converted into binary floating point Caution 1 When the same device is specified The same device number can be specified in 1 1 and 1 In this case note that the subtraction result changes in every operation cycle when the continuous operation type instruction DE...

Страница 510: ...d to 1 When a constant K or H is specified as 1 or 1 it is automatically converted into binary floating point Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing binary floating point data used in multiplication Real number binary 1 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in multiplication Data register number storing the multiplication result Oper and Type Bit Devices...

Страница 511: ...d DESDIVP Binary floating point data 1 is divided by binary floating point data 1 and the division result in the binary floating point format is transferred to 1 When a constant K or H is specified as 1 or 1 it is automatically converted into binary floating point Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing binary floating point data used in division Real number binary 1 Word dev...

Страница 512: ...g case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the operation result is outside the following range error code K6706 2 126 Operation result 2128 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing binary floating point data used in exponential operation Real number binary Head device number storing the operation result Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Device...

Страница 513: ...D value set in X020 to X027 is 88 or less because of loge2128 88 7 If a value 89 or more is set an operation error occurs To prevent this operation error when a value more than 89 is set M0 is set to ON so that the exponential operation is not executed 2 Conversion from natural logarithm into common logarithm In the CPU operations are executed in natural logarithm For obtaining a value in common l...

Страница 514: ... operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a negative value is specified in error code K6706 When 0 is specified in error code K6706 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing binary floating point data used in the natural logarithm operation Real number binary Head device number storing the operatio...

Страница 515: ...FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Program example In the program example shown below natural logarithm of 10 set in D50 is calculated and stored to D30 and D31 when X000 turns ON X000 FNC 49 FLT D50 Data used in the natural logarithm operation is set 1 The data to be used is converted into binary floating point real number 2 The natural logarithm operation is executed 3 ...

Страница 516: ...ration error occurs in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a negative value is specified in error code K6706 When 0 is specified in error code K6706 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing binary floating point data used in the common logarithm operation Real number binary Head device number storing the operation result...

Страница 517: ...FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Program example In the program example shown below common logarithm of 15 set in D50 is calculated and stored to D30 and D31 when X000 turns ON X000 FNC 49 FLT D50 Data used in the common logarithm operation is set 1 The data to be used is converted into binary floating point real number 2 The common logarithm operation is executed 3 D40...

Страница 518: ...d refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Error The contents of 1 are valid only when a positive value is set When a negative value is set the operation error flag M8067 turns ON and the instruction is not executed Operand Type Description Data Type Word device number storing binary floating point data whose square root is calculated Real number binary 1 Data register number storing the square root of binary fl...

Страница 519: ...tion and operation 1 32 bit operation DENEG and DENEGP The sign of binary floating point stored in 1 is inverted and the negation result is stored to 1 Program example In the program example shown below the sign of floating point data stored in D100 and D101 is inverted and the negation result is stored to D100 and D101 when X000 turns ON Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number stori...

Страница 520: ...d DINTP Binary floating point stored in 1 is converted into a binary integer and transferred to 1 Instruction for inverse conversion The inverse conversion is executed by DFLT FNC 49 instruction For FLT FNC 49 instruction refer to Section 12 10 Operand Type Description Data Type Data register number storing binary floating point data to be converted into a binary integer Real number binary Data re...

Страница 521: ...139 Floating Point 19 FNC140 FNC149 Data Operation 2 20 FNC150 FNC159 Positioning Control Related devices For the methods of zero borrow and carry flags refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Caution 1 Caution in the operation Values after the decimal point are rounded Device Name Description M8020 Zero flag Turns ON when the operation result is 0 M8021 Borrow flag Turns ON when the conversion result is cut in...

Страница 522: ...rs System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction DSIN DSINP Mnemonic Operation Condition 32 bit Instruction 9 steps Continuous Operation Pulse Single Operation P FNC 130 SIN D S D S D S S D D Command input ...

Страница 523: ...peration 1 32 bit operation DCOS and DCOSP A value of angle binary floating point specified in 1 is converted into the cosine value and transferred to 1 Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing an angle in radians in binary floating point Real number binary Device number storing the cosine value in binary floating point Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digi...

Страница 524: ...ription Data Type Device number storing an angle in radians in binary floating point Real number binary Device number storing the tangent value in binary floating point Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3...

Страница 525: ... result stored in 1 is expressed in radians from π 2 to π 2 For conversion between radians and degrees refer to the RAD FNC136 and DEG FNC137 instructions For the RAD FNC136 instruction refer to Section 18 24 For the DEG FNC137 instruction refer to Section 18 25 Error An operation error is caused in the following case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a value...

Страница 526: ...the SIN 1 operation 1 The value in radians is converted into the value in degrees 2 The angle expressed in binary floating point real number is converted into an integer binary 3 X000 FNC137 DDEG D10 D20 FNC133 DASIN D0 D10 FNC129 INT D20 D30 END The angle expressed in integer binary is output to the display unit 4 FNC 18 BCD D30 K4Y40 Binary floating point real number value 0 5 D1 D0 1 Conversion...

Страница 527: ...ation result stored in 1 is expressed in radians from 0 to π For conversion between radians and degrees refer to the RAD FNC136 and DEG FNC137 instructions For the RAD FNC136 instruction refer to Section 18 24 For the DEG FNC137 instruction refer to Section 18 25 Error An operation error is caused in the following case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a valu...

Страница 528: ...ing point real number is converted into an integer binary 3 X000 FNC137 DDEG D10 The angle in radians is calculated by the COS 1 operation 1 The value in radians is converted into the value in degrees 2 D20 FNC134 DACOS D0 D10 FNC129 INT D20 D30 The angle expressed in integer binary is output to the display unit 4 FNC 18 BCD D30 K4Y40 END Binary floating point real number value 0 5 D1 D0 1 Convers...

Страница 529: ... in 1 and stored to 1 A real number can be directly specified as The angle operation result stored in 1 is expressed in radians from π 2 to π 2 For conversion between radians and degrees refer to RAD FNC136 and DEG FNC137 instructions For RAD FNC136 instruction refer to Section 18 24 For DEG FNC137 instruction refer to Section 18 25 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a t...

Страница 530: ...ng point real number is converted into an integer binary 3 X000 FNC137 DDEG D10 The angle in radians is calculated by the TAN 1 operation 1 The value in radians is converted into the value in degrees 2 D20 FNC135 DATAN D0 D10 FNC129 INT D20 D30 The angle expressed in integer binary is output to the display unit 4 FNC 18 BCD D30 K4Y40 END Binary floating point real number value 1 D1 D0 1 Conversion...

Страница 531: ...d operation 1 32 bit operation DRAD and DRADP The unit of 1 is converted from degrees into radians and the operation result is stored to 1 A real number can be directly specified as The conversion from degrees into radians is executed as follows Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a value in degrees to be converted into a value in radians Real number binary Head device nu...

Страница 532: ...t value in radians and stored to D20 and D21 when X000 turns ON Operation when 120 is specified in X020 to X037 X000 FNC 49 FLT D0 Angle to be converted into radians is input 1 The input angle is converted into binary floating point real number 2 The angle is converted from degrees into radians 3 D10 FNC 19 BIN K4X20 D0 FNC136 DRAD D10 D20 END 120 1 2 1 Conversion into binary BIN 120 b15 b0 2 Conv...

Страница 533: ...red to Y040 and Y057 when X000 turns ON Operation when 1 435792 is specified in D20 and D21 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a value in radians to be converted into a value in degrees Real number binary Head device number storing a value in degrees acquired by conversion Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special U...

Страница 534: ...applied instructions and for executing special processing FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 140 WSUM Sum of Word Data Section 19 1 141 WTOB WORD to BYTE Section 19 2 142 BTOW BYTE to WORD Section 19 3 143 UNI 4 bit Linking of Word Data Section 19 4 144 DIS 4 bit Grouping of Word Data Section 19 5 145 146 147 SWAP Byte Swap Section 19 6 148 149 SORT2 Sort Tabulated Data 2 Section 19 7 WSUM ...

Страница 535: ...ored as 32 bit data in 1 2 32 bit operation DWSUM and DWSUMP The sum of n 32 bit data starting from 1 is stored as 64 bit data in 3 2 1 Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing data whose sum is calculated 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing sum 32 or 64 bit binary n Number of data 0 n 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Dig...

Страница 536: ...s specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DWSUM D0 D100 R0 n is R1 R0 Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When n points starting from are outside the specified device range error code K6706 When n is smaller than or equivalent to 0 error code K6706 When are outside the specified device range er...

Страница 537: ...its of each device and later storing the separated byte data Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing data to be separated in byte units 16 bit binary Head device number storing result of separation in byte units n Number of byte data to be separated 0 n Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real ...

Страница 538: ...ror code K6706 When n is an odd number the number of a rounded up value decides the number of devices error code K6706 When the separated data destination devices to n 1 are outside the specified device range error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below the data stored in D10 to D12 is separated in byte units and stored in D20 to D25 Instruction Description BTOW FNC142 Combines the ...

Страница 539: ...as shown below For example when n is 5 the low order byte 8 bits of to 4 is stored in to 2 and 00H is stored in the high order byte 8 bits of 2 4 When n is 0 the BTOW instruction is not executed Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing data to be combined in byte units 16 bit binary Head device number storing data acquired by combination in byte units n Number of byte data to ...

Страница 540: ...nation devices to n 2 are outside the specified device range error code K6706 When n is an odd number the number of a rounded up value decides the numer of devices error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below the low order byte 8 bits data stored in D20 to D25 is combined and stored in D10 to D12 Instruction Description WTOB FNC141 Separates consecutive 16 bit data in byte units 8 b...

Страница 541: ...3 the high order 4 4 n bits of are set to 0 For example when n is 3 the low order 4 bits of to 2 are stored in b0 to b11 of and the high order 4 bits of are set to 0 Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing data to be combined 16 bit binary Device number storing combined data n Number of data to be combined 0 to 4 When n is 0 UNI instruction is not executed Oper and Type Bit D...

Страница 542: ...e the specified device range error code K6706 When n is outside the range from 0 to 4 error code K6706 Program example In the program below the low order 4 bits of D0 to D2 are combined and stored in D10 when X000 turns ON Instruction Description DIS FNC144 Separates 16 bit data in 4 bit units S S b15 b4 b3 b0 D0 D1 D2 D10 b15 b12b11 b4 b3 b0 Combined data 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0...

Страница 543: ... 4 in n In the case of n 0 DIS instruction is not executed 3 High order 12 bits of n devices starting from are set to 0 Related instruction Operand type Description Data type Device number storing data to be separated 16 bit binary Head device number storing separated data n Number of data to be separated 0 to 4 When n is 0 DIS instruction is not executed Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Oth...

Страница 544: ...are outside the specified device range error code K6706 When n is outside the range from 0 to 4 error code K6706 Program example In the program below D0 is separated into 4 bit units and stored in D10 to D13 when X000 turns ON D D X000 FNC144 DISP D0 D10 K4 END b15 b4 b3 b0 b2 b1 D10 b15 b12b11 b4 b3 b0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0...

Страница 545: ... and low order 8 bits are swapped for each other in each word device Caution When the continuous operation type instruction is used swapping is executed in each operation cycle This instruction works in the same way as the extension function of the XCH FNC 17 instruction Operand type Description Data type Word device whose high order 8 bits and low order 8 bits are swapped for each other 16 or 32 ...

Страница 546: ...r descending order based on the group data in column No n and the result is stored in the data table occupying m1 x m2 points from For operation examples refer to Page 523 Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing the data table which occupies m1 m2 points 16 or 32 bit binary m1 Number of data lines 1 to 32 m2 Number of group data columns 1 to 6 Head device number storing the o...

Страница 547: ... stored in the data table sorting result having m1 m2 points from 1 For operation examples refer to Page 523 The data table configuration is explained in an example in which the sorting source data table has 3 lines and 4 columns m1 K3 m2 K4 For the sorting result data table understand as Set the sorting order by setting M8165 to ON or OFF When a data register D or extension register R is used for...

Страница 548: ...lt when the instruction is executed with n K2 column No 2 in the case of ascending order 2 Sorting result when the instruction is executed with n K3 column No 3 in the case of descending order Number of groups m2 K4 Column No 1 2 3 4 Line No Control number Height Weight Age Numberof data m1 5 1 1 2 3 1 150 45 20 2 4 5 6 7 2 180 50 40 3 8 9 10 11 3 160 70 30 4 12 13 14 15 4 100 20 8 5 16 17 18 19 5...

Страница 549: ...T2 instruction When the same device is specified in and The source data is overwritten with the data acquired by sorting Pay close attention not to change the contents of until execution of SORT2 instruction is completed Ensure that the sorted data does not overlap with the source data Note that the 32 bit values m1 1 m1 and n 1 n are valid when D or R is specified as m1 or n in a 32 bit instructi...

Страница 550: ...ymbol Function Reference 150 DSZR DOG Search Zero Return Section 20 1 151 DVIT Interrupt Positioning Section 20 2 152 TBL Batch Data Positioning Mode Section 20 3 153 154 155 ABS Absolute Current Value Read Section 20 4 156 ZRN Zero Return Section 20 5 157 PLSV Variable Speed Pulse Output Section 20 6 158 DRVI Drive to Increment Section 20 7 159 DRVA Drive to Absolute Section 20 8 Target instructi...

Страница 551: ...data 3 Applicable devices S1 D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S2 Specify X000 to X007 S3 Specify Y000 Y001 or Y002 1 transistor output from the main unit or specify Y000 Y001 Y002 3 or Y003 3 from a high speed output special adapter 2 1 Y002 is not available in 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLC 2 High speed output special adapters can...

Страница 552: ... a circuit block including the FNC150 instruction while pulses are output the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output Function change depending on the version The function of FNC150 instruction is changed depending on the version as shown in the table below For explanation of the instruction and the contents of function change refer to the Positioning Control Edition Special high speed output adapt...

Страница 553: ...00 Y001 Y002 2 or Y003 2 from a high speed output special adapter 1 1 High speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC 2 To use Y002 and Y003 with a high speed output special adapter connected a second high speed output special adapter Points When using a relay output type or triac output type FX3U PLC a special high speed output adapter is required Outputs of special high spee...

Страница 554: ...table below For explanation of the instruction and the contents of function change refer to the Positioning Control Edition Special high speed output adapter No Pulse output Rotation direction output No 1 1st unit Y000 Y004 Y001 Y005 No 2 2nd unit Y002 Y006 Y003 Y007 Applicable version Item Outline of function FX3U FX3UC Ver 2 20 or later Ver 1 30 or later Interrupt input signal specification func...

Страница 555: ... adapter 2 1 Y002 is not available in 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLC 2 High speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC 3 To use Y002 and Y003 with a high speed output special adapter connected a second high speed output special adapter Points When using a relay output type or triac output type FX3U PLC a special high speed output adapter is required Outputs of special hig...

Страница 556: ...re not available S3 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation Operand type Description Data type Head device number inputting absolute ABS data output signal sent from servo amplifier Three points are occupied from Bit Head device number outputting absolute ABS data control signal to servo amplifier Three points are occupied from Device number storing...

Страница 557: ...ecify Y000 Y001 Y002 3 or Y003 3 from a high speed output special adapter 2 1 Y002 is not available in 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLC 2 High speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC 3 To use Y002 and Y003 with a high speed output special adapter connected a second high speed output special adapter Points When using a relay output type or triac output type FX3U PLC a spe...

Страница 558: ...celerates and stops pulse output Function change depending on the version The function of FNC156 instruction is changed depending on the version as shown in the table below For explanation of the instruction and the contents of function change refer to the Positioning Control Edition Applicable version Item Outline of function FX3G FX3U FX3UC Ver 1 00 or later Ver 2 20 or later Ver 2 20 or later C...

Страница 559: ... output type FX3U PLC a special high speed output adapter is required Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers S2 When using a special high speed output adapter for the pulse output destination in an FX3U PLC the rotation direction signal must be used by the following table output When using a built in transistor output for the pulse output destination in an ...

Страница 560: ...n the version The function of the FNC157 instruction is changed depending on the version as shown in the table below For explanation of the instruction and the contents of function change refer to the Positioning Control Edition PLC operation when writing is excuted during RUN while instruction is executed During operation with acceleration deceleration 1 Decelerates and stops pulse output During ...

Страница 561: ... or specify Y000 Y001 Y002 3 or Y003 3 from a high speed output special adapter 2 1 Y002 is not available in 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLC 2 High speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC 3 To use Y002 or Y003 with a high speed output special adapter connected a second high speed output special adapter Points When using a relay output type or triac output type FX3U PLC ...

Страница 562: ...istor output S3 D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S4 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation Caution on writing during RUN During RUN avoid writing while DRVI FNC158 instruction is executed that is while pulses are output Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block inclu...

Страница 563: ...3 or Y003 3 from a high speed output special adapter 2 1 Y002 is not available in 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLC 2 High speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC 3 To use Y002 or Y003 with a high speed output special adapter connected a second high speed output special adapter Points When using a relay output type or triac output type FX3U PLC a special high speed output...

Страница 564: ...istor output S3 D b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs However index modifiers V and Z are not available S4 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation Caution on writing during RUN During RUN avoid writing while DRVA FNC159 instruction is executed that is while pulses are output Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block inclu...

Страница 565: ...ontrol FNC160 to FNC169 FNC160 to FNC169 provide operation and comparison instructions for the time data These instructions can set the time of the built in PLC real time clock and converts the format of the time data FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 160 TCMP RTC data compare Section 21 1 161 TZCP RTC data zone compare Section 21 2 162 TADD RTC data addition Section 21 3 163 TSUB RTC data...

Страница 566: ... Specifies minute of the comparison time setting range 0 to 59 16 bit binary Specifies second of the comparison time setting range 0 to 59 16 bit binary Specifies hour of the time data hour minute and second Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Turns ON or OFF according to the comparison result Three devices are occupied Bit Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Speci...

Страница 567: ...the values of special data registers by TRD FNC166 instruction and then specify those word devices as the operands Program example S1 S2 S3 S S S D Turns ON in the case of Turns ON in the case of Turns ON in the case of Command input FNC160 TCMP S1 S2 S3 S D Even if the command contact turns OFF from ON and TCMP instruction is not executed 1 and 2 hold the status before the command contact turned ...

Страница 568: ...me hour minute and second Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Specifies hour of the time data hour minute and second Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Turns ON or OFF according to the comparison result Three devices are occupied Bit Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointe...

Страница 569: ...cial data registers by TRD FNC166 instruction and then specify those word devices as the operands Program example S1 S2 S3 D Turns ON in the case of Turns ON in the case of Turns ON in the case of The setting range of hour is from 0 to 23 The setting range of minute is from 0 to 59 The setting range of second is from 0 to 59 S1 Specify the lower limit of the comparison time zone in hour minute and...

Страница 570: ...iption Data type Specifies hour of the first time data hour minute and second used in addition Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Specifies hour of the second time data hour minute and second used in addition Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Stores the addition result hour minute and second of two time data Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devic...

Страница 571: ...occupied devices Three devices are occupied by and respectively Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine 2 When utilizing the time hour minute and second of the built in PLC real time clock Read the values of special data registers using the TRD FNC166 instruction and then specify those word devices as the operands Program example When the operation result exceed...

Страница 572: ...rand type Description Data type Specifies hour of the time data hour minute and second used in subtraction Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Specifies hour of the time data hour minute and second used in subtraction Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Stores the subtraction result hour minute and second of two time data Three devices are occupied 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices...

Страница 573: ...pied devices Three devices are occupied by and respectively Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine 2 When utilizing the time hour minute and second of the built in PLC real time clock Read the values of special data registers using the TRD FNC166 instruction and then specify those word devices as the operands Program example When the operation result is smaller...

Страница 574: ...as follows Operand type Description Data type Head device number storing the time data hour minute and second before conversion 16 bit binary Device number storing the time data second after conversion 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX K...

Страница 575: ...nutes 58 seconds is specified the operation is as follows Error An operation error is caused in the following case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the data of 1 or 2 is outside the allowable range error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below the time data read from the built in PLC real time clock is converted into data in units of second and...

Страница 576: ...n is as follows Operand type Description Data type Device number storing the time data second before conversion 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing the time data hour minute and second after conversion 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b ...

Страница 577: ...d stored to three devices 1 and 2 hour minute and second For example when 45 325 seconds is specified the operation is as follows Error An operation error is caused in the following case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is store in D8067 When the data of is outside the allowable range error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below the time data in units of second store...

Страница 578: ...e sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine Operand type Description Data type Specifies the head device number storing the clock data Seven devices are occupied 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D ...

Страница 579: ... data several minutes ahead to to 6 in advance and then execute FNC167 instruction when the accurate time has come When setting the clock data time using this instruction it is not necessary to control the special auxiliary relay M8015 time stop and time setting If a numeric value indicating impossible date time is set the clock data is not changed Set the correct clock data and then write it Oper...

Страница 580: ...executed and K2000 fixed value is transferred to D8018 year in only one operation cycle after the PLC mode was changed to RUN the year mode is switched to the 4 digit mode Execute this program every time the PLC mode is changed to RUN Even if K2000 is transferred only the display format is changed to the 4 digit year mode The current date and time are not affected In the 4 digit year mode the set ...

Страница 581: ...t destination It turns ON when the current value exceeds the time specified in Specify a latched battery backed type data register as so that the current value data can be continuously used even after the PLC turns OFF If a general type data register is used the current value data is cleared when the power to the PLC is turned OFF or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN Even after the alarm...

Страница 582: ...larm output turns ON the measurement is continued When the current value 1 reaches the maximum value of 32 bit data the measurement is stopped For continuing the measurement clear the current value stored in to 2 Caution Number of occupied devices Two 16 bit operation or three 32 bit operation devices are occupied by Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine Progr...

Страница 583: ... Data Comparison 29 FNC250 FNC269 Data Table Operation 30 FNC270 FNC275 Ex Device Inverter Comms 22 External Device FNC170 to FNC179 FNC170 to FNC179 provide conversion instructions for gray codes used in absolute type rotary encoders and instructions dedicated to analog blocks FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 170 GRY Decimal to Gray Code Conversion Section 22 1 171 GBIN Gray Code to Deci...

Страница 584: ... Type Description Data Type Conversion source data or word device storing conversion source data 16 or 32 bit binary Word device storing data after conversion 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3...

Страница 585: ...om 0 to 2 147 483 647 Caution When an input relay X is specified as the response relay will be Scan time of PLC Input filter constant The input filter value in X000 to X017 1 can be converted using the REFF FNC51 instruction or D8020 filter adjustment so that the delay caused by the filter constant is eliminated 1 X000 to X007 in FX3G PLCs Operand Type Description Data Type Conversion source data ...

Страница 586: ...e read from the analog block is stored FX0N 3A 1 0 to 255 8 bits FX2N 2AD 0 to 4095 12 bits 1 The FX0N 3A is available only for the FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Operand Type Description Data Type m1 Special block number FX3G FX3U FX3UC D DS DSS PLC K0 to K7 FX3UC 32MT LT 2 K1 to K7 16 bit binary m2 Analog input channel number 16 bit binary Word device storing the read data 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit D...

Страница 587: ... 2 K1 to K7 K0 indicates the built in CC Link LT master m2 Analog output channel number FX0N 3A 1 K1 ch 1 FX2N 2DA K21 ch 1 or K22 ch 2 Data to be written Specify a value output to the analog block FX0N 3A 1 0 to 255 8 bits FX2N 2DA 0 to 4095 12 bits 1 The FX0N 3A is available only for the FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Operand Type Description Data Type m1 Special block number FX3G FX3U FX3UC D DS DSS PLC K...

Страница 588: ...pped with the built in inverter communication function dedicated instructions shown below are provided EXTR instruction is not provided Instruction correspondence table 1 This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs For details refer to the Data Communication Edition manual FX2N FX2NC FX3G FX3U FX3UC Description EXTR K10 FNC270 IVCK Inverter status check EXTR K11 FNC271 IVDR Inverter drive E...

Страница 589: ...arison 29 FNC250 FNC269 Data Table Operation 30 FNC270 FNC275 Ex Device Inverter Comms 24 Others FNC181 to FNC189 FNC181 to FNC189 provide instructions for generating random numbers executing CRC data operations and processing data in high speed counter operations FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 181 182 COMRD Read device comment data Section 24 1 183 184 RND Random Number Generation Sect...

Страница 590: ...S T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 P FNC 182 COMRD Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 5 steps COMRD COMRDP Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse Single Operation 32 bit Instruction S D S D S D Command input FNC182 COMRDP S D S D 0 1 2 When M8091 is OFF 0000H is written to the device following the final character When M8091 is ON the device f...

Страница 591: ...tion error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a comment is not registered for the device error code K6706 When the range of points used from for the comment exceeds the corresponding device range error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below the comment Target Line A registered to D100 is stored in ASCII code in D...

Страница 592: ...11 D8310 as the initial value when the power is restored Program example In the program example shown below a random number is stored to D100 every time X010 turns ON When the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN the time data converted into seconds and added by the value Year Month Day is written to D8311 and D8310 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a random number 16 bit...

Страница 593: ...ong M8330 to M8334 as the timing clock output destination device 3 The counted number of scans is stored among D8330 to D8334 in accordance with the timing clock output destination device The counted number of scans stored among D8330 to D8334 is reset when the counted value reaches n1 n2 or when the command input instruction is set to ON Operand Type Description Data Type n1 Number of scans opera...

Страница 594: ...code K6705 Program example In the program shown below when X000 is set to ON M8330 is set to ON for 1 scan and OFF for 3 scans n1 n2 status ON OFF status n1 0 n2 0 Fixed to OFF n1 0 n2 0 Fixed to ON Device Name Description M8330 Timing clock output 1 Timing clock output in the DUTY FNC186 instruction M8331 Timing clock output 2 M8332 Timing clock output 3 M8333 Timing clock output 4 M8334 Timing c...

Страница 595: ...evices S Make sure to specify four digits K4 when specifying the digits of a bit device Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation CRC value is generated for n 8 bit data unit byte starting from a device specified in and stored to The 8 bit conversion mode and 16 bit conversion mode are available in this instruction and the mode can be switched by turning ON or OFF M8161 For the oper...

Страница 596: ...High order byte High order bits of D100 03H 1 Low order byte Low order bits of D101 03H 0203H High order byte High order bits of D101 02H 2 Low order byte Low order bits of D102 00H 1400H High order byte High order bits of D102 14H n 2 1 Low order byte High order byte Device storing the generated CRC value Low order byte Low order bits of D0 E4H 41E4H High order byte High order bits of D0 41H Exam...

Страница 597: ...CRC value CRC 16 There are many other standard polynomials for generating the CRC value Note that the CRC value completely differs if an adopted polynomial is different Reference Major polynomials for generating the CRC value Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When any digits other than 4 digits are specifi...

Страница 598: ... byte 30H High order byte 31H D101 3332H Low order byte 32H High order byte 33H D102 3534H Low order byte 34H High order byte 35H D103 3736H Low order byte 36H Device storing generated CRC value D0 2ACFH Low order byte CFH High order byte 2AH Contents of target data Device storing data for which the CRC value is generated D100 Low order byte 30H D101 Low order byte 31H D102 Low order byte 32H D103...

Страница 599: ...ue of the high speed counter or ring counter is processed as shown in the table below depending on the set value of n 1 Ring counters D8099 and D8398 cannot be specified in FX3UC PLCs before Ver 2 20 Operand Type Description Data Type Device number of high speed counter or ring counter 1 handled as transfer source 32 bit binary Device number handled as transfer destination n Specification to clear...

Страница 600: ...uction a hardware counter does not change into a software counter For the condition in which a hardware counter is handled as a software counter refer to Subsection 4 7 9 When the number of high speed software counter comparison instructions is reduced the total frequency limitation is decreased For the limitation in software counters by the total frequency refer to Subsection 4 7 10 When it is ne...

Страница 601: ...6 If an input interrupt is generated while input interrupts are disabled by something other than the interrupt disable flags M8050 to M8055 after execution of DI instruction and before execution of EI instruction DHCMOV instruction is immediately executed but execution of the interrupt program is held The interrupt program will be executed after EI instruction is executed and interrupts are enable...

Страница 602: ...is executed 2 Program example 2 In the program example shown below the current value of C235 is transferred to D201 and D200 and the current value of C235 is cleared when X001 turns from OFF to ON 1 K0 The current value of the high speed counter is not cleared when DHCMOV instruction is executed K1 The current value of the high speed counter is cleared when DHCMOV instruction is executed M8000 D0 ...

Страница 603: ...ce Inverter Comms 25 Block Data Operation FNC190 to FNC199 FNC190 to FNC199 provide instructions for adding subtracting and comparing block data FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 190 191 192 BK Block Data Addition Section 25 1 193 BK Block Data Subtraction Section 25 2 194 BKCMP Block Data Compare Section 25 3 195 BKCMP Block Data Compare Section 25 3 196 BKCMP Block Data Compare Section 2...

Страница 604: ...data Head device number storing operation result n Number of data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 n 3 3 3 3 DBK DBK P Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 9 steps BK B...

Страница 605: ...ing is executed At this time the carry flag does not turn ON In the case of 16 bit operation In the case of 32 bit operation Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DBK D0 D100 D200 R0 n is R1 R0 Instruction Description BK FNC193 Subtracts binary block data K32767 H7FFF K2 H0002 K 32767 H8001 K 32768 H8000 K 2 HFFFE K32766 H7FF...

Страница 606: ...es starting from overlap n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from error code K6706 When n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from overlap n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below the specified number of data stored in D150 to D0 are added to the specified number of data stored in D100 to D0 when X020 is set to ON and the ...

Страница 607: ...o 32767 can be directly specified in Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing subtraction data 16 or 32 bit binary Subtracted constant or head device number storing subtraction data Head device number storing operation result n Number of data Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Chara...

Страница 608: ...when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DBK D0 D100 D200 R0 n is R1 R0 Instruction Description BK FNC192 Adds binary block data K 32768 H8000 K2 H0002 K32766 H7FFE K32767 H7FFF K 2 HFFFE K 32767 H8001 K 2 147 483 648 H80000000 K2 H00000002 K2 147 483 646 H7FFFFFFE K2 147 483 647 H7FFFFFFF K 2 HFFFFFFFE K 2 147 483 647 H80000001 Command input FNC193 DBK P S1 S2 n D S2 S...

Страница 609: ... following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from and or exceed the corresponding device range error code K6706 When n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from overlap n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from error code K6706 When n 2n in 32 bit operation devices starting from overlap n 2n in 32 bit op...

Страница 610: ...le Operation 32 bit Instruction 17 steps Continuous Operation Pulse Single Operation P FNC 194 BKCMP D DBKCMP DBKCMP P Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 9 steps BKCMP BKCMP P Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation Pulse Single Operation 32 bit Instruction 17 steps Continuous Operation Pulse Single Operation P FNC 195 BKCMP D DBKCMP DBKCMP P Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 ...

Страница 611: ... in 3 The table below shows the comparison result in each instruction 4 When the comparison result is ON 1 in all of n points starting from M8090 block comparison signal turns ON Instruction Comparison result ON 1 condition Comparison result OFF 0 condition BKCMP FNC194 BKCMP FNC195 BKCMP FNC196 BKCMP FNC197 BKCMP FNC198 BKCMP FNC199 S1 S2 D FNCOOO 1 BKCMP 2 Command input S1 S2 n D 1 The number ou...

Страница 612: ...ce Name Description M8090 Block comparison signal Turns ON when all comparison results are ON 1 in a block data instruction DBKCMP FNC194 DBKCMP FNC195 DBKCMP FNC196 DBKCMP FNC197 DBKCMP FNC198 and DBKCMP FNC199 S1 S1 S2 S2 D D Command input FNCOOO 1 DBKCMP 2 S1 S2 n D 1 The number out of 194 to 199 is put in OOO 2 The symbol out of or corresponding to the FNC No is put in 1 n points K1234 K5678 K...

Страница 613: ...BKCMP or BKCMP is used an operation error is caused error code K6705 Note that the 32 bit value n 1 n is valid when D or R is specified as n in a 32 bit instruction In the case of DBKCMP D0 D100 M0 R0 n is R1 R0 Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the range of n 2n in 32 bit operation points starting fr...

Страница 614: ...the four points starting from M10 Y000 is set to ON 2 In the program shown below the constant K1000 is compared with four data starting from D10 when X010 is set to ON and the comparison result is stored in b4 to b7 of D0 D100 Comparison result K1000 K2000 K4000 K3000 D101 D102 D103 OFF Y000 D200 K1000 K2000 K4000 K5000 D201 D202 D203 M10 ON ON ON OFF M11 M12 M13 X020 FNC194 BKCMP D100 D200 M10 EN...

Страница 615: ...ngs such as linking character string data replacing some characters and extracting character string data FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 200 STR BIN to Character String Conversion Section 26 1 201 VAL Character String to BIN Conversion Section 26 2 202 Link Character Strings Section 26 3 203 LEN Character String Length Detection Section 26 4 204 RIGHT Extracting Character String Data fro...

Страница 616: ... Type Description Data Type Head device number storing the number of digits of a numeric value to be converted 16 bit binary Device number storing binary data to be converted 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing converted character string Character string Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Cha...

Страница 617: ... any value other than 0 the decimal point 2EH is automatically added in number of digits of decimal part 1 th digit When the number of digits of the decimal part 1 is set to 0 the decimal point is not added When the number of digits of the decimal part 1 is larger than the number of digits of 16 bit binary data stored in 0 30H is automatically added and the data is shifted to the right end during ...

Страница 618: ...sfy Number of digits of decimal part Number of all digits 3 4 32 bit binary data to be converted stored in 1 should be ranging from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 1 2 3 20H space is stored in each digit 8 1 123 Number of all digits Number of digits of decimal part 16 bit binary data S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S2 S1 D Command input FNC200 DSTR S2 S1 D 8 3 4 3 2 1 S1 0 1 b15 0 2 b8 b7 b0 D 1 36H 6 34H 4 33H ...

Страница 619: ...e end of a converted character string When the number of all digits is even 0000H is stored in the device after the last character When the number of all digits is odd 00H is stored in the high order byte 8 bits of the device storing the final character Related instructions Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D806...

Страница 620: ...16 bit binary data stored in D10 is converted into a character string in accordance with the digit specification by D0 and D1 when X000 is set to ON and then stored in D20 to D23 D X000 Data to be converted is set FNC 12 MOVP K12672 D10 END K6 D0 K0 D1 FNC200 STRP D0 D10 D20 FNC 12 MOVP FNC 12 MOVP The number of all digits is set The number of digits of the decimal part is set 12672 6 0 b15 b8 b7 ...

Страница 621: ...ing a character string into binary data the data from to a device number storing 00H is handled as a character string in byte units Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a character string to be converted into binary data Character string Head device number storing the number of all digits of the binary data acquired by conversion 16 bit binary Head device number storing th...

Страница 622: ...he decimal point 2EH 5 stores 16 bit data bin converted from a character string with the decimalpoint ignored In the character string located in and later space 20H and 0 30H characters between the sign and the first number other than 0 are ignored in the conversion to 16 bit binary data Description Number of all characters digits 2 to 8 Number of characters digits of decimal part 0 to 5 and small...

Страница 623: ...onverted 3 stores the number of all digits The number of all digits indicates the number of all characters including the number sign and decimal point 4 1 stores the number of digits of the decimal part The number of digits of the decimal part indicates the number of all characters after the decimal point 2EH Description Number of all characters digits 2 to 13 Number of characters digits of decima...

Страница 624: ...l characters in the character string to be converted and later and the number of characters after the decimal point does not satisfy the following error code K6706 Number of all characters 3 Number of characters after the decimal point When the sign is set to any ASCII code other than space 20H and 2DH error code K6706 When a digit of a number is set to any ASCII code other than 0 30H to 9 39H or ...

Страница 625: ... 1 In the program below the character string data stored in D20 to D22 is regarded as an integer value converted into a binary value and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON 2 In the program below the character string data stored in D20 to D24 is regarded as an integer value converted into a binary value and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON X000 FNC201 VALP D10 D0 END D20 1654 6 2 b15 b8 b7 b0 D...

Страница 626: ...s stored in the high order byte of the device storing the last character When the number of characters after linking is even 0000H is stored in the device after the last character Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing the link source data character string or directly specified character string Character string Head device number storing the link data character string or dir...

Страница 627: ...stored in Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the number of devices after a device number specified by is smaller than the number of devices required to store all linked character strings that is when 00H cannot be stored after all character strings and the last character error code K6706 When the same ...

Страница 628: ...ype Description Data Type Head device number storing a character string whose length is to be detected Character string Device number storing the detected character string length number of bytes 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T ...

Страница 629: ...aracter codes in which 2 bytes express 1 character such as shift JIS codes the length of 1 character is detected as 2 Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When 00H is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by error code K6706 When the detected number of characters is 32768 or m...

Страница 630: ... a character string Character string Head device number storing extracted character string n Number of characters to be extracted 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ...

Страница 631: ...cter codes for 1 character Note that the expected character code is not given if only 1 byte is executed out of a 2 byte character code Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When 00H is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by error code K6706 When n exceeds the number of chara...

Страница 632: ...haracters is even 0000H is stored in the device after the last character Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing a character string Character string Head device number storing extracted character string n Number of characters to be extracted 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Rea...

Страница 633: ... code is not given if only 1 byte is executed out of a 2 byte character code Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When 00H is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by error code K6706 When n exceeds the number of characters specified by error code K6706 When the number of devi...

Страница 634: ...evice number storing a character string Character string Head device number storing extracted character string Head device number specifying the head position and number of characters to be extracted Head character position 1 Number of characters 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac t...

Страница 635: ...of characters to be extracted specified by 1 is 0 the extraction processing is not executed When the number of characters to be extracted specified by 1 is 1 the entire character string stored in and later is stored to and later Cautions When handling character codes other than ASCII codes note the following contents The number of characters is handled in byte units 8 bits Accordingly in the case ...

Страница 636: ... is smaller than the number of devices required to store extracted characters as many as the number specified by 1 that is when 00H cannot be stored after all character strings and the last character error code K6706 When specifies a negative value error code K6706 When 1 specifies 2 or less error code K6706 When 1 specifies a number larger than the number of characters specified by error code K67...

Страница 637: ... overwriting Character string Head device number storing character string to be overwritten Head device number specifying the head position and number of characters to be overwritten Head character position to be overwritten 1 Number of characters to be overwritten 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant R...

Страница 638: ... B 41H A 44H D 43H C ABCDEFGHI 1 8 5 3 4 00H 1 2 b15 b8b7 b0 42H B 41H A 44H D 43H C ABCD01234 3 4 00H Characters from the 5th character to the last character are overwritten Excessive characters 35H 5 to 37H 7 are not stored 1st character 5th character 5th character 8th character Position from the left end in the character string stored in and later Number of characters from the left end in the c...

Страница 639: ... only 1 byte is overwritten out of a 2 byte character code Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When 00H is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by or error code K6706 When the value specified by exceeds the number of characters of the character string stored in and later err...

Страница 640: ...device number storing a character string Character string Head device number storing a character string to be searched Character string Head device number storing search result 16 bit binary n Search start position 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D ...

Страница 641: ...tarting from error code K6706 When 00H NULL is not located within the corresponding device range starting from error code K6706 Program example 1 In the program example below the character string CI23 D0 and later is searched from the 5th character from the left end head character of the character string CI2312CIM R0 and later when X000 is set to ON The search result is stored in D100 S1 42H B 41H...

Страница 642: ... stored in D10 to D13 is transferred to D11 to D14 the transfer is executed as shown below Operand Type Description Data Type Directly specified character string up to 32 characters or head device number storing character string which is handled as the transfer source Character string Head device number storing transferred character string Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User ...

Страница 643: ...ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When 00H does not exist in the range specified from device error code K6706 When the specified character string cannot be stored in devices from the device specified by to the last device error code K6706 Program example In the program example shown below character string data stored in D10 to D12 is transferred to D20 through D22 b15 b8 b7 b0 D10 32H 2 00H...

Страница 644: ...d controlling leftward rightward shift instructions with carry FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 210 FDEL Deleting Data from Tables Section 27 1 211 FINS Inserting Data to Tables Section 27 2 212 POP Shift Last Data Read FILO Control Section 27 3 213 SFR 16 bit data n Bit Shift Right with Carry Section 27 4 214 SFL 16 bit data n Bit Shift Left with Carry Section 27 5 215 216 217 218 219 FD...

Страница 645: ...racted by 1 Caution The device range used in a data table should be controlled by the user The data table has number of stored data starting from 1 Refer to the program example Related instruction Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing deleted data value 16 bit binary Head device number in data table n Position of deleted data in table Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Other...

Страница 646: ... stored specified in is 0 error code K6706 When the data table range exceeds the corresponding device range error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below the 2nd data value entry is deleted from the data table stored in D100 to D105 and the deleted data is stored in D0 When the amount of data stored is 0 however the FDEL FNC210 instruction is not executed The device range used in the...

Страница 647: ... the number of stored data is added by 1 Caution The device range used in a data table should be controlled by the user The data table has number of stored data starting from 1 Refer to the program example Related instruction Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing data to be inserted 16 bit binary Head device number in data table n Data insertion position in table Oper and Type B...

Страница 648: ... the condition n 0 error code K6706 When the data table range exceeds the corresponding device range error code K6706 Program example In the program shown below data stored in D100 is inserted into the 3rd position of the data table stored in D0 to D4 When the amount of data stored exceeds 7 however the FINS FNC211 instruction is not executed The device range used in the data table is D0 to D7 D D...

Страница 649: ...rol Every time the instruction is executed for the word devices to n 1 a device Pointer data is read to The last data entry written by the shift write SFWR instruction for first in first out control is read to Specify n ranging from 2 to 512 Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing first in data including pointer data 16 bit binary Device number storing last out data n Length ...

Страница 650: ...nter is 0 the zero flag M8020 turns ON and the instruction is not executed Check in advance using a comparison instruction whether the current value of satisfies 1 n 1 and then execute this instruction When the current value of the pointer is 1 0 is written to and the zero flag M8020 turns ON Error An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code...

Страница 651: ...275 Ex Device Inverter Comms Program example Among values stored in D20 input first to D101 to D106 the last value input is stored to D10 and 1 is subtracted from the number of stored data pointer D100 every time X000 turns ON When the first in data is as shown in the table below Pointer D100 K3 Data D101 H1234 D102 H5678 D103 HABCD D104 H0000 D105 H0000 D106 H0000 FNC 38 SFWR D20 K7 END D100 FNC2...

Страница 652: ... n th bit bit n 1 in the word device is transferred to the carry flag M8022 3 0 is set to n bits from the most significant bit Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing data to be shifted 16 bit binary n Number of times of shift 0 n 15 Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String ...

Страница 653: ...ing to the data bit specification Related device For the carry flag use method refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Error An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a negative value is set to n error code K6706 Program example In the program example shown below the contents of Y010 to Y023 are shifted rightward by the number of...

Страница 654: ... th bit bit n in the word device is transferred to the carry flag M8022 3 0 is set to n bits from the least significant bit Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing data to be shifted 16 bit binary n Number of times of shift 0 n 15 Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Poi...

Страница 655: ... bits are shifted according to the data of bit specification Related device For the carry flag use method refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Error An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When a negative value is set to n error code K6706 Program example In the program example shown below the contents of Y010 to Y017 are shifted...

Страница 656: ...ompare Section 28 1 225 LD Load Compare Section 28 1 226 LD Load Compare Section 28 1 227 228 LD Load Compare Section 28 1 229 LD Load Compare Section 28 1 230 LD Load Compare Section 28 1 231 232 AND AND Compare Section 28 2 233 AND AND Compare Section 28 2 234 AND AND Compare Section 28 2 235 236 AND AND Compare Section 28 2 237 AND AND Compare Section 28 2 238 AND AND Compare Section 28 2 S2 S1...

Страница 657: ...00 FNC209 Character String Control 27 FNC210 FNC219 Data Operation 3 28 FNC220 FNC249 Data Comparison 29 FNC250 FNC269 Data Table Operation 30 FNC270 FNC275 Ex Device Inverter Comms 239 240 OR OR Compare Section 28 3 241 OR OR Compare Section 28 3 242 OR OR Compare Section 28 3 243 244 OR OR Compare Section 28 3 245 OR OR Compare Section 28 3 246 OR OR Compare Section 28 3 247 248 249 FNC No Mnemo...

Страница 658: ... S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3 FNC 224 LD D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 5 steps LD Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation 32 bit Instruction 9 steps LDD Continuous Operation FNC 225 LD D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 5 steps LD Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation 32 bit Instruction 9 steps LDD Continuous Operation FNC 226 LD ...

Страница 659: ... C200 to C255 If a 32 bit counter is specified in the 16 bit operation such as LD LD and LD a program error or operation error will occur 3 Programming of data comparison instructions When programming in GX Developer symbols and cannot be input Separate into and and separate into and The input procedure is described below Operating procedure a Display the circuit program edit window and put the cu...

Страница 660: ... 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3 FNC 232 AND D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 5 steps AND Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation 32 bit Instruction 9 steps ANDD Continuous Operation FNC 233 AND D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 5 steps AND Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation 32 bit Instruction 9 steps ANDD Continuous Operation FNC 234 AND D Mnemonic Operat...

Страница 661: ...er is specified in the 16 bit operation such as AND AND and AND a program error or operation error will occur 3 Programming of data comparison instructions When programming in GX Developer symbols and cannot be input Separate into and and separate into and The input procedure is described below Operating procedure a Display the circuit program edit window and put the cursor in a position where a d...

Страница 662: ... 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3 FNC 240 OR D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 5 steps OR Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation 32 bit Instruction 9 steps ORD Continuous Operation FNC 241 OR D Mnemonic Operation Condition 16 bit Instruction 5 steps OR Mnemonic Operation Condition Continuous Operation 32 bit Instruction 9 steps ORD Continuous Operation FNC 242 OR D Mnemonic Opera...

Страница 663: ...hen comparing 32 bit counters C200 to C255 If a 32 bit counter is specified in the 16 bit operation such as OR OR and OR a program error or operation error will occur 3 Programming of data comparison instructions When programming in GX Developer symbols and cannot be input Separate into and and separate into and The input procedure is described below Operating procedure a Display the circuit progr...

Страница 664: ... 256 LIMIT Limit Control Section 29 1 257 BAND Dead Band Control Section 29 2 258 ZONE Zone Control Section 29 3 259 SCL Scaling Coordinate by Point Data Section 29 4 260 DABIN Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion Section 29 5 261 BINDA BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion Section 29 6 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 SCL2 Scaling 2 Coordinate by X Y Data Section 29 7 D LIMIT S3 S2 S1 D BAND S3 S2 S1 D ZONE ...

Страница 665: ...68 to the lower limit value specified in Operand Type Description Data Type Lower limit value minimum output value 16 or 32 bit binary Upper limit value maximum output value Input value controlled by the upper and lower limit values Head device number storing the output value controlled by the upper and lower limit values Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specificatio...

Страница 666: ...y the lower limit value set 2 147 483 647 to the upper limit value specified in 1 Error An operation error is caused when the instruction is executed in the setting status shown below The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code K6706 is stored in D8067 Relationship 16 bit operation 32 bit operation 1 1 S2 S3 S3 S1 S1 S2 S2 D D FNC256 DLIMIT 1 1 1 1 1 1 S1 S2 S3 D Command input In the case of ...

Страница 667: ...alues 500 to 5000 and the controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON Operation In the case of D0 500 500 is output to D1 In the case of 500 D0 5000 the value of D0 is output to D1 In the case of D0 5000 5000 is output to D1 2 Program example 2 In the program example shown below the BCD data set in X020 to X057 is controlled by the limit values 10000 and 1 000 000 and the controlled value ...

Страница 668: ...pper limit value of the dead band no output band Input value controlled by the dead band Device number storing the output value controlled by the dead band Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U G V Z Modify K H E P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ...

Страница 669: ...value is a 32 bit binary value with sign Accordingly if the operation result is outside the range from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 it is handled as follows Error An operation error is caused when the instruction is executed in the setting status shown below The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code K6706 is stored in D8067 Relationship 16 bit operation 32 bit operation 1 1 S3 S3 S1 S1 S2...

Страница 670: ... D0 1000 0 is output to D1 In the case of D0 1000 D0 1000 is output to D1 2 Program example 2 In the program example shown below the BCD data set in X020 to X057 is controlled by the dead band from 10000 to 10000 and a controlled value is output to D11 and D10 when X000 turns ON Operation In the case of D1 D0 10000 D1 D0 10000 is output to D11 D10 In the case of 10000 D1 D0 10000 0 is output to D1...

Страница 671: ...Description Data Type Negative bias value to be added to the input value 16 or 32 bit binary Positive bias value to be added to the input value Input value controlled by the zone Head device number storing the output value controlled by the zone Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Point...

Страница 672: ...t value is a 32 bit binary value with sign Accordingly if the operation result is outside the range from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 it is handled as follows S1 S1 S2 S2 S3 S3 D D In the case of Input value 0 Input value Negative bias value Output value In the case of Input value 0 0 Output value In the case of Input value 0 Input value Positive bias value Output value FNC258 DZONE 1 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Страница 673: ...020 to X037 is controlled by the zone from 1000 to 1000 and the controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON Operation In the case of D0 0 D0 1000 is output to D1 In the case of D 0 0 is output to D1 In the case of D0 0 D0 1000 is output to D1 2 Program example 2 In the program example shown below the BCD data set in X020 to X057 is controlled by the zone from 10000 to 10000 and the control...

Страница 674: ...e used in scaling or device number storing the input value 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing the conversion table used in scaling Device number storing the output value controlled by scaling Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number Charac ter String Pointer X Y M T C S D b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R...

Страница 675: ... of the conversion table for scaling A setting example for the 16 bit operation is shown below For the 32 bit operation set each item using a 32 bit binary value In the case of the conversion characteristics for scaling shown in the figure below set the following data table Conversion setting data table for scaling Set item Device assignment in setting data table Number of coordinate points 5 in t...

Страница 676: ...ints Set item Setting device and setting contents Remarks When R0 is specified in Setting contents Number of coordinate points R0 K10 Point 1 X coordinate 1 R1 K5 Y coordinate 2 R2 K7 Point 2 X coordinate 3 R3 K20 Y coordinate 4 R4 K30 Point 3 X coordinate 5 R5 K50 Y coordinate 6 R6 K100 Point 4 X coordinate 7 R7 K200 When coordinates are specified using three points in this way the output value c...

Страница 677: ...mms Program example In the program example shown below the value input to D0 is processed by scaling based on the conversion table for scaling set in R0 and later and output to D10 Program Operation Conversion setting data table for scaling Set item Device Setting contents Number of coordinate points R0 K6 Point 1 X coordinate R1 K0 Y coordinate R2 K0 Point 2 X coordinate R3 K10 Y coordinate R4 K5...

Страница 678: ...or each digit is ranging from 30H to 39H 5 When an ASCII code for each digit is 20H space or 00H NULL it is handled as 30H Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing data ASCII codes to be converted into binary data Character string Device number storing conversion result 16 or 32 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System Use...

Страница 679: ...sed in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the sign data stored in is any value other than 20H space or 2DH error code K6706 When an ASCII code for each digit stored in to 2 5 is any value other than 30H to 39H 20H space or 00H NULL error code K6706 When the numeric range of to 2 5 is outside the following range error code K6706 When to 2 5 ...

Страница 680: ...ABIN Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion Program example In the program below the sign and decimal ASCII codes in five digits stored in D20 to D22 are converted into a binary value and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON D20 b15 b8 b7 b0 276 D0 Binary value 36H 6 37H 7 20H space 32H 2 2DH 20H space END X000 FNC260 DABINP D20 D0 D21 D22 It is regarded as 00276 276 ...

Страница 681: ...d in is as follows a As sign data low order byte of 20H space is set when the 16 bit binary data stored in is positive and 2DH is set when 16 bit binary data stored in is negative Operand Type Description Data Type Device number storing binary data to be converted into ASCII codes 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing conversion result Character string Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devic...

Страница 682: ...n the left side of the effective digits zero suppression c The high order byte of 5 is set as follows depending on the ON OFF status of M8091 ON OFF status Contents of processing M8091 OFF 3 is set to 0000H NULL M8091 ON 3 does not change ON OFF status Contents of processing M8091 OFF The high order byte of 5 is set to 00H NULL M8091 ON The high order byte of 5 is set to 20H space 0 0 3 2 5 20H Ef...

Страница 683: ... is set to ON and the ASCII codes converted by the PR FNC 77 instruction are output one by one by the time division method to Y040 to Y051 By turning to OFF the output character selector signal M8091 and setting to ON PR mode flag M8027 ASCII codes up to 00H are output For PR mode flag and the PR FNC 77 instruction refer to Section 15 8 Device Name Description M8091 Output character quantity selec...

Страница 684: ...r to the next page Operand Type Description Data Type Input value used in scaling or device number storing the input value 16 or 32 bit binary Head device number storing the conversion table used in scaling Device number storing the output value controlled by scaling Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con stant Real Number C...

Страница 685: ... refer to the next page Setting example of the conversion table for scaling A setting example for the 16 bit operation is shown below For the 32 bit operation set each item using 32 bit binary value In the case of the conversion characteristics for scaling shown in the figure below set the following data table Conversion setting data table for scaling Set item Device assignment in setting data tab...

Страница 686: ...is searched from the low order side of the device numbers in the data table in the operation Accordingly even if only some Xn data is set in the ascending order in the data table the instruction is executed without operation error up to the area of the data table in which the Xn data is set in the ascending order When is outside the data table error code K6706 When the value exceeds the 32 bit dat...

Страница 687: ...on 30 FNC270 FNC275 Ex Device Inverter Comms Program example In the program example shown below the value input to D0 is processed by scaling based on the conversion table for scaling set in R0 and later and output to D10 Program Operation Conversion setting data table for scaling Set item Device Setting contents Number of coordinate points R0 K6 X coordinate Point 1 R1 K0 Point 2 R2 K10 Point 3 R...

Страница 688: ...g operations and reading writing parameters while two or more FREQROL inverters are connected FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 270 IVCK Inverter Status Check Section 30 1 271 IVDR Inverter Drive Section 30 2 272 IVRD Inverter Parameter Read Section 30 3 273 IVWR Inverter Parameter Write Section 30 4 274 IVBWR Inverter Parameter Block Write Section 30 5 275 IVMC Inverter Multi Command Sect...

Страница 689: ...FX3G PLCs 3 Applicable devices S This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation For detailed explanation of the instruction refer to the Data Communication Edition manual 1 16 bit operation IVCK The operation status corresponding to the instruction code 1 specified in of an inverter connected to communication port n whose station number is specified in is ...

Страница 690: ...tion code hexadecimal Read contents Applicable inverter F700 A700 E700 D700 V500 F500 A500 E500 S500 H7B Operation mode 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H6F Output frequency speed 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H70 Output current 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H71 Output voltage 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H72 Special monitor 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H73 Special monitor selection No 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H74 Alarm definition 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H75 Alarm definition 3 3 ...

Страница 691: ...is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation For detailed explanation of the instruction refer to the Data Communication Edition manual 1 16 bit operation IVDR The control value specified in is written to the instruction code 1 specified in of an inverter connected to a communication port n whose station number is specified in 1 Refer to the instruction code list show...

Страница 692: ...rite contents Applicable inverter F700 A700 E700 D700 V500 F500 A500 E500 S500 HFB Operation mode 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HF3 Special monitor selection number 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HF9 Run command expansion 3 3 3 3 HFA Run command 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HEE Set frequency EEPROM 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HED Set frequency RAM 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HFD Inverter reset 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HF4 Alarm definition batch clear 3 3 3 3 3 3 ...

Страница 693: ...ion manual 1 Instruction format 2 Set data 1 Ch2 is not available in 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLCs 3 Applicable devices S This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation For detailed explanation of the instruction refer to the Data Communication Edition manual 1 16 bit operation IVRD The value of the parameter is read from an inverter connected to a ...

Страница 694: ...r the same port at the same time PLC applicable version The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter Number Description Number Description ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2 M8029 Instruction execution complete D8063 D8438 Error code of serial communication error 1 M8063 M8438 Serial communication error 1 D8150 D8155 Response wait time in inverter communication 1 M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating ...

Страница 695: ...rmat 2 Set data 1 Ch2 is not available in 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLCs 3 Applicable devices S This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs Explanation of function and operation For detailed explanation of the instruction refer to the Data Communication Edition manual 1 16 bit operation IVWR A value specified in is written to a parameter in an inverter connected to a communication por...

Страница 696: ... the password cannot be written correctly to Pr297 due to noise etc A password reset error occurs up to 3 times 2 When registering the password When registering the password in the D700 Series inverter using an inverter communication instruction write the password to Pr297 read Pr297 and then confirm that registration of the password is completed normally 3 If writing of the password to Pr297 is n...

Страница 697: ...le 1 parameter numbers and set values specified in and is written to an inverter connected to a communication port n whose station number is all at once 1 The table below shows the data table format Number of parameters to be written Head device number of data table Operand Type Description Data Type Station number of an inverter K0 to K31 16 bit binary Number of parameters in an inverter to be wr...

Страница 698: ... for the same port at the same time Applicable models depending on the PLC version The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter Number Description Number Description ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2 M8029 Instruction execution complete D8063 D8438 Error code of serial communication error 1 M8063 M8438 Serial communication error 1 D8150 D8155 Response wait time in inverter communication 1 M8151 M8...

Страница 699: ...ose station number is specified in Specify the send receive data type using the head device which stores data to be written to the inverter using and the head device which stores values to be read from the inverter using 2 Send recive data type The table below shows valid send data 1 and 2 and receive data 1 and 2 specified by the send receive data type Operand Type Description Data Type Inverter ...

Страница 700: ... communication with the inverter and stores the read status to Accordingly the status written by the IVMC instruction can be read by a next or later read instruction IVCK or IVMC Applicable inverters This instruction is applicable to the following inverters FREQROL E700 February 2009 and later FREQROL D700 Applicable in all For details refer to the respective inverter manual Applicable programming...

Страница 701: ... 3U CF ADP 35 SFC STL Programming 36 Interrupt Function 37 Special Device 38 Error Code A Version Up Information B Execution Times 31 Data Transfer 3 FNC276 to FNC279 FNC275 to FNC279 provide instructions for executing more complicated processing for fundamental applied instructions and for special processing FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 276 277 278 RBFM Divided BFM Read Section 31 1 ...

Страница 702: ...s finished abnormally the instruction execution abnormally complete flag M8329 turns ON When RBFM FNC278 or WBFM FNC279 instruction is executed in another step for the same unit number the instruction non execution flag M8328 is set to ON and execution of such an instruction is paused When execution of the other target instruction is complete the paused instruction resumes Operand Type Description...

Страница 703: ...7 A unit number is automatically assigned to each special extension unit block connected to the PLC The unit number is assigned in the way No 0 No 1 No 2 starting from the equipment nearest the main unit When the main unit is the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 the unit number is assigned in the way No 1 No 2 No 3 starting from the equipment nearest to the main unit because the CC Link LT master is built into the...

Страница 704: ...stored in and later and buffer memories BFM When indexing is executed the contents of index registers at the begining of execution are used Even if the contents of index registers are changed after the instruction such changes do not affect the process of the instruction The contents of n1 devices starting from change while the RBFM FNC278 instruction is executed After execution of the instruction...

Страница 705: ...n block unit whose unit number is No 2 are written to D200 to D279 by 16 points in each operation cycle X000 SET M0 The BFM write start flag is set to ON FNC279 WBFM K2 K1001 D100 K80 K16 BFM write start M0 BFM write start M8029 Instruction execution complete RST M0 M8329 Instruction execution abnormally complete RST M0 X001 SET M5 BFM read start FNC278 RBFM K2 K2001 D200 K80 K16 M5 BFM read start...

Страница 706: ...nished abnormally the instruction execution abnormally complete flag M8329 turns ON When the RBFM FNC278 or WBFM FNC279 instruction is executed in another step for the same unit number the instruction non execution flag M8328 is set to ON and execution of such an instruction is paused When execution of the first target instruction is complete the paused instruction resumes Operand Type Description...

Страница 707: ...abnormally complete refer to Subsection 6 5 2 Related instructions Errors An operation error is caused in the following case The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the unit number m1 does not exist error code K6708 Device Name Description M8029 Instruction execution complete Turns ON when an instruction is finished normally M8328 Instruction non execution Turns ON...

Страница 708: ...c Applied Instruction Edition 32 High Speed Processing 2 FNC280 to FNC289 32 High Speed Processing 2 FNC280 to FNC289 FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 280 HSCT High Speed Counter Compare With Data Table Section 32 1 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 n HSCT D S2 m S1 ...

Страница 709: ...stored in and later and the operation output set value ON or OFF specified in the data table is output to to n 1 Data table used for comparison Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number storing the data table 16 or 32 bit binary m Number of comparison points in data table 1 m 128 16 bit binary High speed counter number C235 to C255 32 bit binary Head device number to which the operatio...

Страница 710: ...ficant digit of the device number is 0 Examples Y000 Y010 and Y020 3 Immediately after step 2 1 is added to the current table counter value D8138 4 The next comparison point is set as the comparison target data 5 Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the current value of the table counter D8138 becomes m When the current value becomes m the instruction execution complete flag M8138 turns ON and the exe...

Страница 711: ...unter D8138 Device Comparison value Device Operation output set value 0 D201 D200 K321 D202 H0001 0 1 D204 D203 K432 D205 H0007 1 2 D207 D206 K543 D208 H0002 2 3 D210 D209 K764 D211 H0000 3 4 D213 D212 K800 D214 H0003 4 Repeated from 0 Device Name Description M8138 HSCT FNC280 instruction execution complete flag Turns ON when the operation for the final table No m 1 is completed D8138 HSCT FNC280 ...

Страница 712: ...as the comparison target at one time Processing will not move to the next comparison point until the current counter value becomes equivalent to the comparison point currently selected as the comparison target If the current value of a high speed counter executes up counting using the comparison data table shown in the operation example on the previous page make sure to execute the instruction whi...

Страница 713: ...t value of C235 counting X000 is compared with the comparison data table set in R0 and later and a specified pattern is output to Y010 to Y013 Operation example Comparison point Comparison data SET RESET pattern Table counter D8138 Device Comparison value Device Operation output set value 0 R1 R0 K100 R2 H0007 0 1 R4 R3 K150 R5 H0004 1 2 R7 R6 K200 R8 H0003 2 3 R10 R9 K250 R11 H0006 3 4 R13 R12 K3...

Страница 714: ...ter Control FNC290 to FNC299 FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 290 LOADR Load From ER Section 33 1 291 SAVER Save to ER Section 33 2 292 INITR Initialize R and ER Section 33 3 293 LOGR Logging R and ER Section 33 4 294 RWER Rewrite to ER Section 33 5 295 INITER Initialize ER Section 33 6 296 297 298 299 n S LOADR D SAVER m S n S INITR D2 LOGR n D1 m S n RWER S n S INITER ...

Страница 715: ...ension registers specified by to n 1 stored in the PLC s built in RAM Reading transfering is executed in device units Up to 32 768 devices can be read transferred As apposed to the SAVER FNC291 INITR FNC292 and LOGR FNC293 instructions it is not necessary to execute this instruction in sector units If n is set to 0 it is handled as 32768 when the instruction is executed Operand Type Description Da...

Страница 716: ...In the program example below the contents current value of extension file registers ER which are stored in the EEPROM built in the PLC and have the same device numbers as extension registers to n 1 are read and transferred to extension registers R which are stored in the RAM built in the PLC and have the device numbers to n 1 Reading transfering is executed in device units Up to 24 000 devices can...

Страница 717: ...ble number of writes In FX3G PLCs Data can be written to the memory cassette EEPROM up to 10 000 times and to the built in memory EEPROM up to 20 000 times Every time the RWER FNC294 instruction is executed it is counted as a write to the memory Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes When a continuous operation type instruction is used data is written to the memory in every operati...

Страница 718: ... 2048 n operation cycles 2048 n 1 cycles if there is a remainder While the instruction is being executed the number of points already written is stored in Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number of extension register sector to which data is to be written Only the head device number of a sector of extension registers can be specified 16 bit binary n Number of points written transferre...

Страница 719: ...cycles When writing data in two or more operation cycles set n ranging from K1 to K1024 Do not abort execution of this instruction in the middle of operation If execution is aborted unexpected data may be written to extension file registers If execution of this instruction is aborted by turning OFF the power execute the instruction again using step 2 described below after turning the power ON agai...

Страница 720: ...ion 2 Store data to extension registers R specified as targets 3 Execute the SAVER instruction 2 When storing sector of 2 048 extension registers R in one sector to extension file registers ER 1 Temporarily withdraw the data of the extension registers R specified as targets of the SAVER instruction to data registers or 2048 unused extension registers R by using the BMOV FNC 15 instruction 2 Execut...

Страница 721: ...ues data of extension registers R may be lost To avoid the data loss back up the data of extension registers R in advance using the following procedure 1 Set the PLC mode to STOP 2 Create a new project in GX Developer This step is not necessary if it is alright to overwrite the current project 3 Read the contents of extension registers R to GX Developer 1 Select Online Read from PLC to display the...

Страница 722: ...e operation cycle Program Operation M0 X000 R0 K1 SET M0 M8029 RST M0 FNC295 INITERP FNC 07 WDTP END FNC291 SAVER R0 K128 D0 1 Instruction execution complete flag 2 R0 K100 R1 K105 R10 K200 R11 K215 Setting data Device number Current value Extension registers R R12 K400 R19 K350 R99 K1000 R100 HFFFF HFFFF R2047 ER0 K100 ER1 K105 ER10 K300 ER11 K330 Setting backup data Device number Current value E...

Страница 723: ...FF R2047 HFFFF ER2047 K2048 R0 K100 R1 K105 R10 K200 R11 K215 Device number Current value Extension registers R R12 K400 R19 K350 R99 K1000 R100 HFFFF HFFFF R127 1st operation cycle HFFFF R128 HFFFF R255 HFFFF R256 HFFFF R1919 HFFFF R1920 ER0 K100 ER1 K105 ER10 K200 ER11 K215 Device number Current value Extension file registers ER ER12 K400 ER19 K350 ER99 K1000 ER100 HFFFF HFFFF ER127 HFFFF ER128 ...

Страница 724: ...R0 K1 SET M0 M8029 RST M0 FNC292 INITRP FNC 07 WDTP FNC291 SAVER R0 K128 D0 END Instruction execution complete flag 1 2 FNC 15 BMOVP R30720 R0 K100 3 4 R0 K100 R1 K105 R10 K200 R11 K215 Setting data Device number Current value Extension registers R R12 K400 R19 K350 R99 K1000 R100 HFFFF HFFFF R2047 ER0 K100 ER1 K105 ER10 K300 ER11 K330 Setting backup data Extension file registers ER ER12 K350 ER19...

Страница 725: ...R0 K100 R1 K105 R10 K200 R11 K215 R12 K400 R19 K350 K1000 R99 HFFFF R100 HFFFF R2047 R0 K100 R1 K105 R10 K200 R11 K215 Extension registers R R12 K400 R19 K350 R99 K1000 R100 HFFFF HFFFF R127 HFFFF R128 HFFFF R255 HFFFF R256 HFFFF R1919 HFFFF R1920 ER0 K100 ER1 K105 ER10 K200 ER11 K215 Extension file registers ER ER12 K400 ER19 K350 ER99 K1000 ER100 HFFFF HFFFF ER127 HFFFF ER128 HFFFF ER255 HFFFF E...

Страница 726: ... a memory cassette is not used extension file registers ER are not initialized 3 Applicable devices Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit operation INITR and INITRP n sectors of extension registers in the PLC s built in RAM starting from the one specified by and n sectors of extension file registers in a memory cassette flash memory having the same device numbers are initialized to HFFFF ...

Страница 727: ...this instruction also 4 Monitor the maximum scan time D8012 unit 0 1 ms using the device batch monitoring function in GX Developer 5 Set the watchdog timer to the maximum scan time D8012 or more D8012 stores the maximum scan time in increments of 0 1 ms Rough guide to the watchdog timer set value D8000 unit ms is the value stored in D8012 divided by 10 added by 50 to 100 Sector number Head device ...

Страница 728: ... is necessary to initialize the writing target sector before executing the SAVER FNC291 or LOGR FNC293 instruction Every time the INITR FNC292 or INITER FNC295 instruction is executed it is counted as a write to the memory Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D...

Страница 729: ...truction is driven m devices starting from are logged until n sectors of extension registers R starting from and extension file registers ER in a memory cassette are filled The number of logged data is stored to If a memory cassette is not used data is not written to extension file registers ER Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number to be logged 1 16 bit binary m Number of devices t...

Страница 730: ...o R8191 ER6144 to ER8191 Sector 11 R22528 R22528 to R24575 ER22528 to ER24575 Sector 4 R8192 R8192 to R10239 ER8192 to ER10239 Sector 12 R24576 R24576 to R26623 ER24576 to ER26623 Sector 5 R10240 R10240 to R12287 ER10240 to ER12287 Sector 13 R26624 R26624 to R28671 ER26624 to ER28671 Sector 6 R12288 R12288 to R14335 ER12288 to ER14335 Sector 14 R28672 R28672 to R30719 ER28672 to ER30719 Sector 7 R...

Страница 731: ...ER FNC295 instruction is executed it is counted as a write to the memory Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When any device number other than the head device number of a sector of extension file registers is set to error code K6706 While data is written...

Страница 732: ...d store the data to the extension file registers inside the memory cassette Program example In the program example shown below D1 and D2 are logged to the area from R2048 to R6143 every time X001 turns ON FX3U C 2 X001 FNC293 LOGRP D1 K2 R2048 K2 D100 HFFFF HFFFF R2048 R2049 HFFFF HFFFF R2050 R2051 HFFFF HFFFF R2052 R5899 HFFFF R5900 HFFFF R5901 HFFFF R6143 Initial value H1234 H5678 HFFFF HFFFF HF...

Страница 733: ...of function and operation 1 16 bit operation RWER 1 In FX3U FX3UC PLCs The contents current values of n extension registers R starting from are written transferred to extension file registers with the same device numbers in a memory cassette flash memory When n is set to 0 it is handled as 32768 when the instruction is executed Operand Type Description Data Type Device number of extension register...

Страница 734: ...urrent values of n extension registers R starting from are written transferred to extension file registers which are stored in the EEPROM built into the PLC and have the same device numbers FNC290 RWERP S n Command input E E 1 E 2 E n 1 1 2 n 1 1 1 All points specified by the instruction are written transferred Write transfer Extension file registers ER inside memory cassette Extension registers R...

Страница 735: ...ion may be aborted If execution is aborted the data may be lost Make sure to back up the data before executing this instruction For the backup method refer to the next page 2 Cautions on writing data to a memory cassette EEPROM for FX3G PLCs Memory cassettes adopt the EEPROM Note the following contents when writing data to extension file registers in a memory cassette using the RWER FNC294 instruc...

Страница 736: ... memory Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes In FX3G PLCs Data can be written to the memory cassette EEPROM up to 10 000 times and to the built in memory EEPROM up to 20 000 times Every time the RWER FNC294 instruction is executed it is counted as a write to the memory Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes When a continuous operation type instruction is used data...

Страница 737: ...Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases The error flag M8067 turns ON and the error code is stored in D8067 When the last device number to be transferred exceeds 32767 1 error code K6706 At this time data is read and transferred until the last device number R32767 1 When a memory cassette is not connected error code K6771 2 When the protect switch of the memory cassette is set t...

Страница 738: ... Operation R0 K100 R1 K105 R10 K200 R11 K215 R12 K400 R19 K350 R99 K1000 R100 HFFFF HFFFF R2047 ER0 K100 ER1 K105 ER10 K200 ER11 K215 ER12 K400 ER19 K350 ER99 K1000 ER100 HFFFF HFFFF ER2047 Write when X000 turns ON Setting data Device number Current value Extension registers R Setting backup data Extension file registers ER Device number Current value Setting data A Changed data Unused ...

Страница 739: ... shows the head device number in each sector Operand Type Description Data Type Head device number of extension register sector with the same device number as the extension file register to be initialized 16 bit binary n Number of sectors of extension file registers to be initialized Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Special Unit Index Con st...

Страница 740: ...8000 unit ms is the value stored in D8012 divided by 10 added by 50 to 100 Setting the WDT FNC 07 instruction just before and after the INITER instruction as shown below If the processing time of the INITER command exceeds 200 ms set the watchdog timer value D8000 unit ms to the processing time or more 2 Allowable number of writes to the memory Note the following cautions on access to extension fi...

Страница 741: ...is stored in D8067 When any device number other than the head device number of a sector of extension file registers ER is set to error code K6706 When a device number to be initialized exceeds 32767 error code K6706 In this case devices up to R32767 ER32767 are initialized When the protect switch of the memory cassette is set to ON error code K6770 When a memory cassette is not connected error cod...

Страница 742: ...FNC300 to FNC305 FNC No Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 300 FLCRT File create check Section 34 1 301 FLDEL File delete CF card format Section 34 2 302 FLWR Data write Section 34 3 303 FLRD Data read Section 34 4 304 FLCMD FX3U CF ADP command Section 34 5 305 FLSTRD FX3U CF ADP status read Section 34 6 n FLCRT S3 S2 S1 n FLDEL S2 S1 n FLWR D S3 S2 S1 n FLRD D2 D1 S2 S1 n S FLCMD n FLSTRD D S ...

Страница 743: ...n the file ID is K1 to K63 When is K1 to K63 the FLCRT instruction creates a file having the specified file name Sequence programs use the file ID for specifying a file Accordingly each file name saved in the CompactFlashTM card is associated with the file ID and controlled by the file ID table If a file having the specified file name already exists and is registered in the file ID table the PLC f...

Страница 744: ... an unused device D or R When is K1 to K63 Specify the file name in up to 8 characters until null or null null Half width alphanumeric characters and half width symbols permitted in the MS DOS are available Half width symbols _ The extension is fixed to CSV Character string File creation parameter Time stamp setting Set whether or not the time stamp is added to the file Specify the format when add...

Страница 745: ...uction formats the CompactFlashTM card Specify the file deletion method or format type using When is K 1 H0FFFF or K0 to K63 specify the deletion method K0 The FLDEL instruction deletes the specified file K1 The FLDEL instruction deletes the association between the file name and the file ID but does not delete the file itself However when the file ID specified in is 0 the FLDEL instruction deletes...

Страница 746: ...port Setting items Description Data Type File ID K 1 H0FFFF The FLDEL instruction deletes all files K0 to K63 The FLDEL instruction deletes a file associated with the specified file ID K512 H200 The FLDEL instruction formats the CompactFlashTM card 16 bit binary When is K 1 H0FFFF or K0 to K63 Specify the deletion method K0 The FLDEL instruction deletes the specified file K1 The FLDEL instruction ...

Страница 747: ...ype Description Data Type File ID Refer to Subsection 34 3 1 16 bit binary Head of devices which store data to be written Refer to Subsection 34 3 1 Data write parameter Refer to Subsection 34 3 1 16 bit binary Position after data writing Refer to Subsection 34 3 1 16 bit binary n Used channel number contents of setting K1 ch1 K2 ch2 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others Syst...

Страница 748: ...tion after writing Written line position if data is not written to the final column position of specified the line position Line position next to the written line position if data is written to the final column position of the line Column position after writing Column position next to the final written data point K1 if data is written to the final data point in the line K1 if data is written to th...

Страница 749: ...is necessary to set the device number in multiples of 16 when a bit device is specified in and the data type is set to anything other than bit type When a word device is specified in and the data type is set to bit the FLWR instruction acquires data to be written from the least significant bit of the specified device When is K7 or K8 00H which indicates the end of the string must be added to the e...

Страница 750: ... 4 1 16 bit binary Data read parameter Refer to Subsection 34 4 1 16 bit binary Device which stores the read data Refer to Subsection 34 4 1 Number of data points existing in the specified line Refer to Subsection 34 4 1 16 bit binary n Used channel number contents of setting K1 ch1 K2 ch2 16 bit binary Oper and Type Bit Devices Word Devices Others System User Digit Specification System User Speci...

Страница 751: ...h store the read data is insufficient the FLRD instruction does not read data from the CF ADP An error occurs When the data type is a character string the character string length is unknown The PLC stores as much read data as possible When reading is not completed even after the final device is reached an error occurs It is not permitted to use an RS FNC 80 RS2 FNC 87 IVCK FNC270 to IVMC FNC275 in...

Страница 752: ...F ADP to the CompactFlashTM card When is K256 H100 the FLCMD instruction sets the CompactFlashTM card to the mounted status if it is in the unmounted status When is K512 H200 the FLCMD instruction sets the CompactFlashTM card to the unmounted status if it is in the mounted status When is K1280 H500 the FLCMD instruction clears error codes stored in the CF ADP For details refer to Subsection 34 5 1...

Страница 753: ...he CompactFlashTM card is available in the mounted status 2 The CompactFlashTM card is unavailable in the unmounted status Cautions It is not permitted to use an RS FNC 80 RS2 FNC 87 IVCK FNC270 to IVMC FNC275 instruction and an FLCRT FNC300 to FLSTRD FNC305 instruction for the same port Setting items Description Data Type Contents of instruction for operation K0 to K63 Forcibly writes the buffere...

Страница 754: ... FLSTRD instruction reads the version information of the CF ADP When is K1024 H400 the FLSTRD instruction reads the error information error flag for errors having occurred in the CF ADP When is K1280 H500 the FLSTRD instruction reads error codes and error code details Up to 5 of the latest error codes and error code details can be stored For details refer to Subsection 34 6 1 Operand Type Descript...

Страница 755: ...Setting items Description Data Type Contents of status to be read K0 to K63 Final line position of each file K256 H100 File IDs stored in the CompactFlashTM card K512 H200 Capacity of the CompactFlashTM card K768 H300 Version of the CF ADP K1024 H400 Error information error flag K1280 H500 Error codes 16 bit binary Head device to which the read status is written The number of data points stored in...

Страница 756: ...e details can be stored Cautions It is not permitted to use an RS FNC 80 RS2 FNC 87 IVCK FNC270 to IVMC FNC275 instruction and an FLCRT FNC300 to FLSTRD FNC305 instruction for the same port Setting items Description Stores the version of CF ADP Example K100 Ver 1 00 Setting items Description Error detection signal b0 The CompactFlashTM card is not mounted b1 The CompactFlashTM card is full b2 An e...

Страница 757: ...sequences for each process Operation of state relay State S and driven instruction In SFC programs each process performed by the machine is expressed by a state relay Operations of internal circuits connected to state relays are classified into three types execution in the contact ON status execution in the contact OFF status for one operation cycle and non execution Execution in the contact ON st...

Страница 758: ...ed again in different state relays 31 SET Y31 State relay number Y030 2 Y032 Y030 When X001 turns ON S32 is activated and S31 is automatically reset 32 3 Activated Transfer condition X001 Transfer condition number Internal circuit TRAN X002 TRAN 31 SET Y31 Y030 Y032 Y030 32 Activated X001 TRAN X002 TRAN 1 1 Y31 programmed in the SET instruction remains ON even if S31 turns OFF ...

Страница 759: ...gain after a series of operations finish the above operation is repeated 2 Creating a process drawing Create the process drawing shown on the right using the following procedure 1 Divide the operation described in the above example into individual processes and express each process in a rectangle in the order of operation from top to bottom 2 Connect each process with vertical lines and write the ...

Страница 760: ...ent timer number etc used for an operation performed in each process Many devices such as timers counters and auxiliary relays are provided in a PLC and can be used arbitrarily The timer T0 is used here Because T0 works by the 0 1 sec clock the output contact turns ON five seconds after a coil is driven when the set value is K50 If there are two or more loads such as timers and counters which are ...

Страница 761: ...o RUN When inputting a program using GX Developer write a relay ladder program to a ladder block and write an SFC program to an SFC block Programs expressing operations in state relays and transfer conditions are handled as internal circuits of the state relays and transfer conditions Create each one using a relay ladder For details on the programming procedure in GX Developer refer to GX Develope...

Страница 762: ...ven by a contact other than the STL instruction is there by defined as the initial state relay and should be described at the top of the flow Role of the initial state relay 1 Used as an identification device for inverse conversion In inverse conversion from an instruction list into an SFC program it is necessary to identify the top of the flow For this purpose use the initial state relay S0 to S9...

Страница 763: ...elow shows major ones 1 Processed when the END instruction is executed Instruction State relay LD LDI LDP LDF AND ANI ANDP ANDF OR ORI ORP ORF INV MEP MEF OUT SET RST PLS PLF ANB ORB MPS MRD MPP MC MCR Initial general state relay Available Available 1 Not available Branch recombination state relay Drive processing Available Available 1 Not available Transfer processing Available Not available Not ...

Страница 764: ...nterlock outside the PLC in conformance to the handy manual of the PLC so that simultaneous driving can be prevented In addition provide on interlock in the program as shown in the right figure Use of a timer two or more times In the same way as an output coil a timer coil can be programmed in different state relays However it is not permitted to program the same timer coil in adjacent state relay...

Страница 765: ...t transfer to a state relay in a lower position jump or transfer to a state relay in a separate flow Use V to express reset of a state relay 1 Transfer source program 2 Transfer destination program In GX Developer z is automatically displayed in the transfer destination state relay 3 Reset circuit program In the program example shown below S65 is reset from S65 by way of X007 Reset of another stat...

Страница 766: ...nuously but all output relays Y turn OFF These output relays are in the ON status in the monitor Position of the MPS MRD and MPP instructions The MPS MRD or MPP instructions cannot be used directly from a bus line in a state relay inside the STL Program MPS MRD or MPP instructions after LD or LDI instructions as shown below Ladder block SFC block Reset FNC 40 ZRST S0 S50 S0 State relays from S0 to...

Страница 767: ... the transfer condition into pulses as shown below so that transfer is not executed by M100 when S30 turns ON for the first time Transfer of state relay ON status by the same signal In some cases it is necessary to transfer the state relay ON status by the ON OFF operation of one pushbutton switch To achieve such a transfer it is necessary to convert the transfer signal into pulses in programming ...

Страница 768: ...ame device number is programmed in a LDP LDF ANDP ANDF ORP or ORF instruction the priority is given to such an instruction and the transfer condition is not effective Caution on using a rising falling edge detection contact When a rising falling detection contact in a LDP LDF ANDP ANDF ORP or ORF instruction is used in a state relay the contact whose status was changed while the state relay was OF...

Страница 769: ...formats This section shows operation patterns of single flows and operation patterns when selective branches and parallel branches are combined in SFC programs 1 Jump and repeat flows 1 Jump Direct transfer to a state relay in a lower position or transfer to a state relay in a different flow is called jump and the transfer destination state relay is indicated by 2 Repeat Transfer to a state relay ...

Страница 770: ... SFC programs created by block separation jump to a different flow A state relay in a program created in a different block can be used as a contact for the internal circuit or transfer condition of another state relay 1 Separation of flow 2 Jump to another flow 3 Using a state relay in a program created in a different block 20 21 3 3 22 SFC block 1 40 41 4 4 42 SFC block 3 20 21 3 3 22 SFC block 1...

Страница 771: ...ndamental style in process transfer control Only single flow is sufficient in sequence control for simple operations When various input conditions and operator manipulations intervene however complicated conditions can be easily handled by using selective branches and parallel branches A branch for selectively processing many processes depending on a condition is called selective branch A branch f...

Страница 772: ...ve branch After making a branch create a transfer condition Selective recombination After creating a transfer condition recombine Parallel branch After creating a transfer condition make a branch Parallel recombination After recombining create a transfer condition 21 20 X000 1 TRAN 31 X001 11 TRAN 41 X002 21 TRAN 50 29 X010 10 TRAN 20 X011 39 TRAN 30 X012 49 TRAN 21 20 X000 1 TRAN 31 41 50 29 X010...

Страница 773: ...anch circuit Limitation in the number of branch circuits In one parallel branch or selective branch up to eight circuits can be provided When there are many parallel branches and selective branches however the total number of circuits per initial state is limited to 16 or less It is not permitted to execute transfer or reset from a recombination line or state relay before recombination to a branch...

Страница 774: ...a recombination line is directly connected to a branch line without a state relay as shown below it is necessary to provide a dummy state relay between the lines There are no dedicated numbers for dummy state relays Use a state relay number not used in a program as a dummy state relay Dummy state relay 20 30 40 50 60 20 30 40 50 60 20 30 40 50 20 30 40 50 20 30 40 50 60 20 30 40 50 60 20 30 40 50 ...

Страница 775: ...n 37 Special Device 38 Error Code A Version Up Information B Execution Times 2 When there are selective branches continuously reduce the number of branches X000 20 1 2 X001 21 3 22 4 5 29 X003 X007 6 X004 23 7 24 8 X006 9 10 25 11 26 12 13 X013 X017 X010 X011 14 27 15 28 16 X014 X016 20 1 X000 21 2 22 3 24 4 23 5 24 6 7 25 8 26 9 10 27 11 28 12 TRAN X001 TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRA...

Страница 776: ...parallel branches or to recombine parallel branches after a transfer condition 4 In the flow shown below it is not determined whether a selective or parallel branch is provided Change it as shown below 5 The following flows are allowed Flow B is alright In flow A however note that an operation is paused at a point where parallel branches are recombined X000 TRAN X000 TRAN X001 X000 TRAN X001 X000 ...

Страница 777: ...the right This change enables inverse conversion from a program on the instruction word basis into an SFC program The flow on the left cannot be converted into an SFC program 35 1 11 Program examples Examples of single flows 1 Example of flicker circuit 1 When the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN the state relay S3 is driven by the initial pulse M8002 2 The state relay S3 outputs Y000 One seco...

Страница 778: ...ach output is switched in turn every 2 seconds by a timer 2 Continuous operation X001 ON Y001 to Y007 turn ON in turn repeatedly 3 Stepping operation X002 ON Every time the start button is pressed each output turns ON in turn M8000 Ladder block 20 3 1 0 TRAN X000 Y000 Y001 T1 TRAN T1 K20 M8047 RUN monitor X002 M8040 Stepping M8002 Initial pulse X000 Start S3 SET Enable STL monitoring STL transfer ...

Страница 779: ...valid If either one among S0 to S899 and S1000 to S4095 is ON M8046 turns ON after the END instruction is executed This SFC program adopts latched battery backed type state relays so that the operation is restarted from this process when the start button is pressed even after the power is interrupted in the middle of operation However all outputs except Y020 are disabled until the start button is ...

Страница 780: ...er position 20 M8002 0 1 Ladder block SFC block 0 TRAN X000 S0 SET T0 TRAN T0 K20 Initial pulse Start Y000 SET Motor M1 is started X001 21 T1 K30 Y001 SET Motor M2 is started 27 TRAN X001 Stop 9 2 TRAN T1 X001 22 T2 K40 Y002 SET Motor M3 is started 26 X001 Stop 10 TRAN 3 TRAN T2 X001 23 Y003 SET Motor M4 is started 25 X001 Stop 11 TRAN 24 T4 K40 Y003 RST Motor M4 is stopped 4 TRAN X001 5 TRAN T4 2...

Страница 781: ...d that a flow does not cross except branch lines and recombination lines 20 M8002 0 1 Ladder block SFC block 0 TRAN X000 S0 SET T0 T0 K20 Initial pulse Start Y000 SET X001 21 T1 K30 Y001 SET 2 T1 X001 22 T2 K40 Y002 SET 3 T2 X001 23 Y003 SET 24 T4 K40 Y003 RST 4 X001 Stop 5 T4 25 T5 K30 Y002 RST 6 T5 26 T6 K20 Y001 RST 7 T6 27 Y000 RST 8 Y000 0 RET END TRAN X001 Stop 9 30 TRAN S30 10 31 TRAN X001 ...

Страница 782: ...ing large and small balls The figure below shows a mechanism which selects and carries large and small balls using conveyors The upper left position is regarded as the origin and the mechanism performs in the order moving down suction moving up moving rightward moving down release moving up moving leftward When the arm moves down and the electromagnet pushes a large ball the lower limit switch LS2...

Страница 783: ...rd TRAN X004 Right limit switch small bucket Y000 Moving down 5 31 TRAN X002 Lower limit switch T2 Y001 RST Release K10 6 TRAN T2 Y002 Moving up TRAN X003 Upper limit switch 32 7 X004 33 8 Y004 Moving leftward TRAN X001 X001 Left limit switch 0 9 25 10 26 11 27 12 Origin TRAN T0 X002 Lower limit switch OFF large ball T1 K10 Y001 SET Suction T1 TRAN TRAN Y002 Moving up X003 Y003 Moving rightward TR...

Страница 784: ...low Y001 Red The SFC program for a pushbutton type crosswalk is as shown below In this example a partial flow jump to a state relay located in an upper position is repeated for blinking the green lamp on the crosswalk When the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN the initial state relay S0 turns ON Normally the green lamp is ON for the road and the red lamp is ON for the sidewalk When the crossing...

Страница 785: ...e A Version Up Information B Execution Times M8002 Ladder block SET Initial pulse 0 SFC block 0 21 1 T0 RET END TRAN 0 X000 X001 Crossing button Y003 Road Green T0 K300 22 2 T1 TRAN Y002 Road Yellow T1 K100 23 Y001 T2 K50 Road Red 30 3 T2 31 4 T3 32 5 T4 33 6 C0 T5 34 8 T6 TRAN TRAN Y005 Sidewalk Red TRAN Y006 Sidewalk Green T3 K150 T4 K5 TRAN Y006 C0 K5 T5 K5 TRAN 7 C0 TRAN T5 32 Y005 T6 C0 RST K...

Страница 786: ...lay A state relay consists of a drive coil and contact STL contact in the same way as other relays Use SET or OUT instructions to drive a coil and use STL instructions for a contact Operations of internal circuits connected to state relays are classified into three types execution in the contact ON status execution in the contact OFF status for one operation cycle and non execution Execution in th...

Страница 787: ...CF ADP 35 SFC STL Programming 36 Interrupt Function 37 Special Device 38 Error Code A Version Up Information B Execution Times 1 Output coils can be used again in different state relays STL S31 Y030 X001 SET Y31 SET S32 Y030 Y032 X002 SET S33 1 1 Process of S32 Process of S31 STL S32 When X001 turns ON S32 turns ON and S31 is automatically reset STL S31 Y030 X001 SET Y31 SET S32 Y030 Y032 X002 SET...

Страница 788: ...1 X002 SET S22 STL S22 T0 K50 T0 SET S23 STL S23 Y021 Y023 X003 SET S24 STL S24 Y023 Y021 S0 X002 RET END It is necessary to input the RET instruction in a program Y023 Y021 Ladder block SFC block M8002 SET S0 Program for setting to ON an initial state relay State number and transfer condition number are indicated 0 20 0 1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 S0 RET END X000 TRAN Y021 Y023 X001 T0 X002 Y023 Y021 T...

Страница 789: ...nd role of initial state relays refer to Subsection 35 1 4 For latched battery backed type state relays refer to Subsection 35 1 5 For RET instruction refer to Subsection 35 1 6 1 SET and RST instructions for a state relay are two step instructions When every state relay used in an SFC program is defined programming is complete Program a step ladder program starting from the initial state relay in...

Страница 790: ...L instruction do not drive state relays S using SET or OUT instructions in an interrupt program It is not prohibited to use jump instructions in state relays but it is not recommended because complicated movements will result 1 MPS instruction cannot be used immediately after an STL instruction even in a drive processing circuit Instruction State relay LD LDI LDP LDF AND ANI ANDP ANDF OR ORI ORP O...

Страница 791: ...ng the normally driven status or for indicating the PLC operation status M8002 Initial pulse This relay turns ON and remains ON only momentarily when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN Use this relay for the initial setting of a program or for setting the initial state relay M8040 STL transfer disable When this relay is set to ON transfer of the ON status is disabled among all state relays B...

Страница 792: ...am Replacing and V Replace the symbol used in SFC programs to express repeat jump or transfer to a state relay in another separate flow with the OUT instruction Replace the symbol V used to express reset of a state relay with the RST instruction Y001 Change Y002 Y003 Y001 X005 Y002 Y003 Move the position Y001 M8000 Y003 Y002 Insert Always ON contact X005 RUN monitor or STL S20 STL S20 STL S20 X005...

Страница 793: ...combination 1 Example of selective branch Do not use MPS MRD MPP ANB and ORB instructions in a transfer processing program with branches and recombination Even in a load driving circuit MPS instructions cannot be used immediately after STL instructions In the same way as programs for general state relays program the drive processing first and then program the transfer processing Continuously progr...

Страница 794: ...f parallel branch Do not use MPS MRD MPP ANB and ORB instructions in a program with branches and recombination Even in a load driving circuit MPS instructions cannot be used immediately after STL instructions In the same way as programs for general state relays program the drive processing first and then program the transfer processing Continuously program all transfer processing STL OUT STL OUT S...

Страница 795: ...f the state relays After that program only the transfer processing to the recombination state relay 5 Composition of branches and recombination When a recombination line is directly connected to a branch line without a state relay as shown below it is necessary to provide a dummy state relay between the lines Create step ladder programs as shown below 1 Selective recombination and selective branch...

Страница 796: ... 30 2 50 60 S101 TRAN SET S101 STL S101 STL S30 SET S60 Step ladder SFC program List program Dummy state STL LD SET STL LD SET STL LD SET SET 102 20 1 X000 S102 TRAN 2 X001 STL S20 SET S102 S20 X000 S102 S30 X001 S102 S102 S102 S40 S50 30 3 40 50 X001 TRAN X102 TRAN SET S102 STL S30 S102 SET S40 STL S102 SET S50 Step ladder SFC program List program Dummy state List program STL STL LD SET STL LD SE...

Страница 797: ... flows 1 Example of flicker circuit When the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN the state relay S3 is driven by the initial pulse M8002 The state relay S3 outputs Y000 1 second later the ON status transfers to the state relay S20 The state relay S20 outputs Y001 1 5 seconds later the ON status returns to the state relay S3 1 second 1 5 seconds Y000 Y001 LD SET STL OUT OUT LD SET STL OUT OUT LD O...

Страница 798: ...UT LD SET STL OUT LD SET STL OUT OUT LD SET STL OUT OUT LD SET STL OUT OUT LD SET STL OUT OUT LD AND OUT LD ANI OUT RET END M8000 M8047 X002 X000 M8040 M8002 S3 S3 Y000 X000 S20 S20 Y001 T1 K20 T1 S21 S21 Y002 T2 K20 T2 S22 S22 Y003 T3 K20 T3 S27 S27 Y007 T7 K20 T7 X001 S20 T7 X001 S3 M8000 0 1 3 4 5 7 8 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 20 21 23 24 25 28 29 31 32 33 36 37 39 40 41 44 45 46 48 49 50 52 53 0 3 ...

Страница 799: ...mechanism which selects and carries large and small balls using conveyors The upper left position is regarded as the origin and the mechanism performs in the order moving down suction moving up moving rightward moving down release moving up moving leftward When the arm moves down and the electromagnet pushes a large ball the lower limit switch LS2 turns OFF When the electromagnet pushes a small ba...

Страница 800: ... LDI ANI OUT STL LD SET STL LD 34 35 38 39 41 42 43 44 46 47 48 49 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 63 64 S30 S30 Y000 X002 S31 S31 Y001 T2 K10 T2 S32 S32 Y002 X003 S33 S33 X001 Y003 Y004 X001 S0 SET STL OUT LD SET STL RST OUT LD SET STL OUT LD SET STL LDI ANI OUT LD OUT RET END 65 67 68 69 70 72 73 74 77 78 80 81 82 83 85 86 87 88 89 90 92 93 Y007 T1 T1 K10 K10 Y000 T0 K20 Y002 Y002 Y003 Y003 Y00...

Страница 801: ...relay located in an upper position is repeated for blinking the green lamp on the crosswalk When the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN the initial state relay S0 turns ON Normally the green lamp is ON for the road and the red lamp is ON for the sidewalk When the crossing button X000 or X001 is pressed the state relay S21 specifies road green and the state relay S30 specifies sidewalk red The si...

Страница 802: ... 47 50 51 53 54 55 T5 K5 C0 T5 S34 C0 T5 S32 S34 Y005 C0 T6 K50 S23 S34 T6 S0 OUT LD AND SET LDI AND OUT STL OUT RST OUT STL STL LD OUT RET END 58 61 62 63 65 66 67 69 70 71 73 76 77 78 79 81 82 X000 X001 6 13 21 T2 26 33 30 T1 61 C0 T5 C0 T5 T6 12 25 41 38 T3 42 47 46 78 T6 S0 S0 STL SET C0 K5 Y003 T0 K100 Y002 Y006 T5 K5 K50 T2 Y003 T1 S22 SET S30 STL S22 STL S31 SET Y005 K300 S31 STL S23 SET Y0...

Страница 803: ...4 3 Timer interrupt function timer interrupt activated in a constant cycle The main sequence program is paused in a constant cycle of 10 to 99 ms and an interrupt routine program is executed with priority For details refer to Section 36 5 4 High speed counter interrupt function interrupt function given at counting up 3 When the current value of a high speed counter reaches a specified value the ma...

Страница 804: ...pt processing is started after considerable time When the interrupt disabling setting is not required program only EI instruction It is not always necessary to program DI instruction 2 Disabling interrupt pointers for each interrupt routine interrupt function 1 Programming method The special auxiliary relays M8050 to M8059 for disabling interrupt are provided While an interrupt disable flag M8050 ...

Страница 805: ...riod are immediately executed when the execution of FROM TO instructions are completed FROM TO instruction can be used in an interrupt program when M8028 is OFF 2 While M8028 is ON When an interrupt is generated while a FROM TO instruction is being executed execution of the FROM TO instruction is paused and the interrupt is immediately executed FROM TO instructions cannot be used in an interrupt r...

Страница 806: ...tion of devices latched in the ON status interrupt function Devices which were set to ON in an interrupt routine are held in the ON status even after the interrupt routine is finished When the RST instruction for a timer or counter is executed the reset status of the timer or counter is also held To turn OFF a device held in the ON status or for canceling such a timer or counter held in the reset ...

Страница 807: ...ion B Execution Times Example in which latched outputs are reset countermeasures 1 Program example 2 Timing chart RST C0 X002 FNC 06 FEND RST C0 RST Y007 Program to reset Y007 at an arbitrary time Program to deactivate the preceding C0 reset instruction inside the subroutine B M8001 RUN monitor normally OFF A Y007 X001 C0 K10 M8000 FNC 05 IRET I001 FNC 04 EI Step 0 X001 Current value of C0 1 2 3 Y...

Страница 808: ... X002 I201 I200 M8052 1 X003 I301 I300 M8053 1 X004 I401 I400 M8054 1 X005 I501 I500 M8055 1 Interrupt routine 1 interrupt program Interrupts are enabled FNC 04 EI FNC 06 FEND FNC 03 IRET I001 Interrupt pointer When the rising edge of X000 is detected FNC 03 IRET Step 0 End of main program Main program Interrupt return I100 Interrupt pointer When the falling edge of X001 is detected END Interrupt ...

Страница 809: ...ing a pulse whose response frequency is 50 k to 100 kHz using a high speed counter perform the following Make sure that the wiring length is 5 m or less Connect a bleeder resistor of 1 5 kΩ 1 W or more to an input terminal and make sure that the load current of the open collector transistor output in the counterpart equipment is 20 mA or more including the input current in the main unit 4 Using a ...

Страница 810: ...ointer When the rising edge of X001 is detected M8000 RUN monitor X010 X010 FNC 04 EI END FNC 06 FEND K8 1 X010 FNC 50 REF Y001 SET Y001 RST FNC 03 IRET Interrupts are enabled by EI instruction The main program is described The main program is finished by FEND instruction When an interrupt routine is executed by turning X001 to ON the input refresh is executed unconditionally and the ON OFF inform...

Страница 811: ... Information B Execution Times 4 When catching a short pulse In the program example shown below the ON status is held for a certain period of time after a short pulse turns ON Pulse input X003 M0 ON ON TO TO Step 0 I301 Interrupt pointer When the rising edge of X003 is detected M8000 RUN monitor M0 M0 T0 K10 FNC 04 EI T0 FNC 06 FEND FNC 03 IRET END SET M0 RST M0 Interrupts are enabled by EI instru...

Страница 812: ...surement SW X000 X001 Step 0 I001 Interrupt pointer M8000 X010 K32767 I100 Interrupt pointer When the falling edge of X001 is detected X010 M0 K1 M8000 The reset status is cleared Timer is driven Measurement is completed Timer is stopped Timer is reset Measurement data When the rising edge of X000 is detected FNC 04 EI FNC 06 FEND T246 FNC 03 IRET FNC 12 M0V T246 FNC 03 IRET END T246 D0 SET M0 RST...

Страница 813: ...T T246 3 4 5 M0 Timing chart Part B in the previous page I001 Interrupt processing I100 Interrupt processing Part A in the previous page Step 0 I001 Interrupt pointer X010 I100 Interrupt pointer X010 X010 Measurement data When the rising edge of X000 is detected When the falling edge of X001 is detected D8099 is set to ON Measurement is completed FNC 04 EI M8099 FNC 06 FEND FNC 03 IRET FNC 12 M0V ...

Страница 814: ...d be executed at high speed while the main program operation time is long or when a program should be executed at a constant time interval in sequence operations M8393 FNC 12 MOV K Delay time specification program Make sure to describe the delay time specification program shown on the left at the head of an interrupt routine program Do not add change or delete this routine program when writing dur...

Страница 815: ... the interrupt program processing time is long When the main program contains an applied instruction which processing time is long 5 Cautions Each pointer number I6 I7 or I8 can only be used once When M8056 to M8058 is set to ON in a program a corresponding timer interrupt is disabled Input number Interrupt cycle ms Interrupt disable Flag I6 An integer ranging from 10 to 99 is put in in the pointe...

Страница 816: ...rocessing of HKY FNC 71 instruction For HKY FNC 71 instruction refer to Section 15 2 Step 0 I610 Interrupt pointer When interrupt is given at every 10 ms M3 X001 FNC 04 EI FNC 06 FEND FNC 24 INC FNC224 LD FNC 03 IRET END SET M3 D0 K1000 D0 RST M3 Interrupts are enabled by EI instruction The main program is described When M3 is set to ON FNC 24 INC instruction becomes valid The main program is fini...

Страница 817: ...d While M8026 is OFF 10 sec While M8026 is ON X000 Start FNC 04 EI FNC 12 MOV K 1 D 1 FNC 12 MOV K255 D 2 PLS M 0 M 0 SET M 1 FNC 06 FEND M 1 FNC 67 RAMP D 1 D 2 D 3 K1000 Initial value Target value Current value Number of times of transfer M 1 M8029 FNC 03 IRET END I610 M8026 Interrupt pointer Step 0 When interrupt is given every 10 ms RST Interrupts are enabled by EI instruction The main program...

Страница 818: ...n only controlling the ON OFF status of an output relay Y or auxiliary relay M according to the current value of a high speed counter a required program can be easily created using DHSCS FNC 53 DHSCR FNC 54 or DHSZ FNC 55 instruction 6 Cautions 1 Pointer number Pointer numbers cannot overlap with each other 2 Disabling interrupts When the special auxiliary relay M8059 is set to ON in a program all...

Страница 819: ...Connect a bleeder resistor of 1 5 kΩ 1 W or more to the input terminal and make sure that the load current of the open collector transistor output in the counterpart equipment is 20 mA or more including the input current in the main unit 3 Cautions on use 1 When receiving an input again it is necessary to reset the device which was once set using a program Accordingly until a device is reset a new...

Страница 820: ...nment of special auxiliary relays and special data registers 1 Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN 2 The measurable pulse width is 10 μs minimum and 100 s maximum The measurable pulse period is 20 μs minimum 1 Program example 1 Pulse width measurement The pulse width of the input signal from X000 is measured Pulse input Pulse width Pulse period measurement flag Pulse period measure...

Страница 821: ...9 are updated Make the pulse width pulse period measurement setting flag M8080 remain OFF for 1 operation cycle or more when discontinuing the pulse input If M8080 does not remain OFF for 1 operation cycle or more the a period shown below is stored as the pulse period X000 OFF ON This duration is measured FNC 04 EI FNC 03 IRET END Step 0 FNC 06 FEND I001 interrupt pointer X000 Rising edge interrup...

Страница 822: ...e rising edge of the input signal from X001 Ring counter value at the rising edge of the input signal from X000 is stored in D9 and D8 The interrupt routine is executed at the rising edge of the input signal from X001 Pulse width Pulse period measurement setting flag FNC 03 IRET END Interrupt return User program FNC 230 LDD D0 FNC 234 ANDD D2 K0 FNC 21 DSUB H7FFFFFFF FNC 21 DSUB D2 H80000000 D6 FN...

Страница 823: ...tions on use The pulse width pulse period measurement function and input interrupts can be used at the same time in the same input terminal When the same input terminal is used by the pulse width pulse period measurement function and the SPD FNC56 DSZR FNC150 or ZRN FNC156 instruction an operation error occurs when the instruction is executed The input terminal used for the pulse width pulse perio...

Страница 824: ...3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8001 RUN monitor NC contact 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8002 Initial pulse NO contact 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8003 Initial pulse NC contact 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8004 Error occurrence FX3G FX3U FX3UC ON when either M8060 M8061 M8064 M8065 M8066 or M8067 is ON FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC ON when either M8060 M8061 M8063 M8064 M8065 M8066 or M8067 is ON 3 3 3 D8004 3 3 3 3 3 M 8005 Battery voltage low ...

Страница 825: ...bsection 37 2 7 3 3 3 3 Always ON 3 M 8019 Real time clock RTC error For real time clock Refer to Subsection 37 2 7 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Flag M 8020 Zero ON when the result of addition subtraction is 0 Refer to Subsection 6 5 2 for usage 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8021 Borrow ON when the result of subtraction is less than the min negative number Refer to Subsection 6 5 2 for usage 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8022 Carry...

Страница 826: ... data memory are retained Refer to Subsection 37 2 12 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8034 1 All outputs disable All external output contacts of PLC are turned OFF Refer to Subsection 37 2 13 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8035 Forced RUN mode Refer to Subsection 37 2 14 for details 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8036 Forced RUN signal 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8037 Forced STOP signal 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8038 Parameter setting Communication param...

Страница 827: ... 3 3 M 8049 1 Annunciator enable D8049 is enabled when M8049 is ON 3 3 3 D8049 M8048 3 3 1 Cleared when the PLC switches from RUN to STOP 2 Executed at END instruction 3 S1000 to S4095 are available only in the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Interrupt Disable Refer to Subsection 36 2 1 for details M8050 input interrupt I00 disable 4 If an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs while a special auxil...

Страница 828: ...FX1N FX2N FX1NC or FX2NC when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Cleared in an FX3G FX3U or FX3UC PLC when PLC power supply from OFF to ON 3 Serial communication error 2 ch2 is detected by M8438 in FX3G FX3U and FX3UC PLCs 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 5 When M8069 is ON I O bus check is executed Refer to Subsection 37 3 1 for details Parallel Link M 8070 6 Parallel link Set M8070 when u...

Страница 829: ...1 D8092 to D8097 M 8080 X000 Pulse period measurement mode 3 1 D8074 to D8079 M 8081 X001 Pulse period measurement mode 3 1 D8080 to D8085 M 8082 X003 Pulse period measurement mode 3 1 D8086 to D8091 M 8083 X004 Pulse period measurement mode 3 1 D8092 to D8097 M 8084 to M 8089 Not used 1 Available in Ver 1 10 or later Flag M 8090 BKCMP FNC194 to FNC199 instructions Block comparison signal 3 3 2 M ...

Страница 830: ...put mode change D8114 3 3 M 8115 FX1N 4EX BD BX3 input 3 3 M 8116 FX1N 2EYT BD BY0 output 3 3 M 8117 FX1N 2EYT BD BY1 output 3 3 M 8118 Not used M 8119 RS FNC 80 and Computer Link ch1 Refer to Data Communication Edition for details M 8120 Not used M 8121 2 RS FNC 80 instruction Send wait flag 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8122 2 RS FNC 80 instruction Send request 3 3 3 D8122 3 3 3 3 3 M 8123 2 RS FNC 80 instr...

Страница 831: ...ction CLR signal output function enable 3 3 3 M 8141 Not used M 8142 M 8143 M 8144 M 8145 Y000 Pulse output stop command 3 3 3 3 M 8146 Y001 Pulse output stop command 3 3 3 3 M 8147 Y000 Pulse output monitor BUSY READY 3 3 3 3 M 8148 Y001 Pulse output monitor BUSY READY 3 3 3 3 M 8149 Not used Inverter Communication Function Refer to Data Communication Edition for details M 8150 Not used M 8151 In...

Страница 832: ...le only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Pulse Catch Refer to Section 36 7 for details M 8170 6 Input X000 pulse catch 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8171 6 Input X001 pulse catch 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8172 6 Input X002 pulse catch 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8173 6 Input X003 pulse catch 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8174 6 Input X004 pulse catch 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8175 6 Input X005 pulse catch 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8176 6 Input X006 pulse catch 3 3...

Страница 833: ...6 3 3 2 3 3 M 8186 1 Data communication error Slave station No 3 3 3 3 M507 3 3 2 3 3 M 8187 1 Data communication error Slave station No 4 3 3 3 M508 3 3 2 3 3 M 8188 1 Data communication error Slave station No 5 3 3 3 M509 3 3 2 3 3 M 8189 1 Data communication error Slave station No 6 3 3 3 M510 3 3 2 3 3 M 8190 1 Data communication error Slave station No 7 3 3 3 M511 3 3 2 3 3 M 8191 1 Data comm...

Страница 834: ... 8209 C209 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8210 C210 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8211 C211 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8212 C212 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8213 C213 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8214 C214 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8215 C215 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8216 C216 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8217 C217 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8218 C218 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8219 C219 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8220 C220 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8221 C221 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8222 C222 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8223 C223 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8224 C224...

Страница 835: ...8248 C248 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8249 C249 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8250 C250 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8251 C251 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8252 C252 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8253 C253 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8254 C254 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8255 C255 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 M 8256 to M 8259 Not used Analog Special Adapter FX3U FX3UC Refer to Subsection 37 2 19 for applicability of each analog special adapter M 8260 to M 8269 1st special adapter 1 3 ...

Страница 836: ...umber in which the error has occurred is stored in D8318 and the BFM number is stored in D8319 3 3 4 D8318 D8319 M 8319 to M 8321 Not used M 8322 FX3UC 32MT LT FX3UC 32MT LT 2 model indicator 1 FX3UC 32MT LT 2 0 FX3UC 32MT LT 3 5 M 8323 CC Link LT configuration required 3 5 M 8324 CC Link LT configuration completed 3 5 M 8325 to M 8327 Not used M 8328 Instruction non execution 3 3 4 M 8329 Instruc...

Страница 837: ... Y000 DOG signal logic reverse 3 3 3 M 8346 2 Y000 Zero point signal logic reverse 3 3 3 M 8347 2 Y000 Interrupt signal logic reverse 3 3 M 8348 Y000 Positioning instruction activation 3 3 3 M 8349 2 Y000 Pulse output stop command 3 3 3 M 8350 Y001 Pulse output monitor ON BUSY OFF READY 3 3 3 M 8351 2 Y001 Clear signal output function enable 3 3 3 M 8352 2 Y001 Zero return direction specification ...

Страница 838: ...y when two FX3U 2HSY ADP units are connected to an FX3U PLC High Speed Counter Function Refer to Subsection 4 7 5 for details M 8380 3 Operation status of C235 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 and C254 3 3 M 8381 3 Operation status of C236 3 3 M 8382 3 Operation status of C237 C242 and C245 3 3 M 8383 3 Operation status of C238 C248 C248 OP C250 C253 and C255 3 3 M 8384 3 Operation status of C23...

Страница 839: ...r to Data Communication Edition for details M 8400 Not used M 8401 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send wait flag 3 3 3 M 8402 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send request 3 3 3 D8402 M 8403 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Receive complete flag 3 3 3 D8403 M 8404 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Carrier detection flag 3 3 3 M 8405 RS2 FNC87 ch1 Data set ready DSR flag 3 3 2 3 2 M 8406 Not used M 8407 M 8408 M 8409 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Time out check flag 3 3 3 1 Th...

Страница 840: ...3 D8438 M 8439 to M 8448 Not used M 8449 Special block error flag 3 3 3 4 D8449 M 8450 to M 8459 Not used 3 Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON 4 Available in Ver 2 20 or later Positioning FX3G FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Refer to Positioning Control Edition for details M 8460 DVIT FNC151 instruction Y000 User interrupt input command 3 3 5 D8336 M 8461 DVIT FNC151 instruction Y001 User ...

Страница 841: ...y 2 2K steps 4 4K steps 8 8K steps If 16K steps or more 8 is written to D8002 and 16 32 or 64 is written to D8102 3 8 3 8 3 8 D8102 3 2 3 8 3 4 8 3 8 3 4 8 D 8003 Memory type Type of internal memory RAM EEPROM EPROM cassette or ON OFF status of protect switch is stored 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 8004 Error number M 3 3 3 M8004 3 3 3 3 3 D 8005 Battery voltage 3 3 3 M8005 3 3 D 8006 Low battery voltage dete...

Страница 842: ...lated instruction execution time from step 0 in 0 1 ms units Refer to Subsection 37 2 5 3 Same as on the right 3 Same as on the right 3 Same as on the right 3 Indicated value includes wait ing time of constant scan opera tion when M8039 is activated D 8011 Minimum scan time Minimum value of scan time in 0 1 ms units Refer to Subsection 37 2 5 D 8012 Maximum scan time Maximum value of scan time in ...

Страница 843: ... Z0 and V0 D 8028 Value of Z0 Z register 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 8029 Value of V0 V register 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 In FX3G FX1N FX1NC PLCs the input filter can be adjusted in X000 to X007 In FX3U FX3UC FX2N FX2NC PLCs 16 points type the input filter can be adjusted X000 to X007 2 The values of Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 are stored in D8182 to D8195 Analog Volume FX3G FX1S FX1N D 8030 Value of analog volume V...

Страница 844: ...N and the first device number of the erroneous block is written to D8060 3 3 3 M8060 3 3 D 8061 Error code for PLC hardware error 3 3 3 M8061 3 3 3 3 3 D 8062 Error code for PLC PP communication error 3 3 3 M8062 3 3 Error code for serial communication error 0 ch0 4 3 M8062 D 8063 5 Error code for serial communication error 1 ch1 3 3 3 M8063 3 3 3 3 3 D 8064 Error code for parameter error 3 3 3 M8...

Страница 845: ...3 3 D 8071 Not used D 8072 D 8073 Sampling Trace 1 FX3U FX3UC FX2N and FX2NC PLCs D 8074 These devices are occupied by the PLC system when the sampling trace function is used in a connected personal computer 1 3 3 M8075 to M8079 3 3 D 8075 3 3 3 3 D 8076 3 3 3 3 D 8077 3 3 3 3 D 8078 3 3 3 3 D 8079 3 3 3 3 D 8080 3 3 3 3 D 8081 3 3 3 3 D 8082 3 3 3 3 D 8083 3 3 3 3 D 8084 3 3 3 3 D 8085 3 3 3 3 D ...

Страница 846: ...it 3 2 M8078 M8082 D 8087 1 Upper D 8088 1 Lower X003 Ring counter value for falling edge 1 6 μs unit 3 2 D 8089 1 Upper D 8090 1 Lower X003 Pulse width Pulse period 10 μs unit 3 2 D 8091 1 Upper D 8092 1 Lower X004 Ring counter value for rising edge 1 6 μs unit 3 2 M8079 M8083 D 8093 1 Upper D 8094 1 Lower X004 Ring counter value for falling edge 1 6 μs unit 3 2 D 8095 1 Upper D 8096 1 Lower X004...

Страница 847: ...FX1N D 8112 FX1N 2AD BD Digital value of ch1 M8112 3 3 D 8113 FX1N 2AD BD Digital value of ch2 M8113 3 3 D 8114 FX1N 1DA BD Digital value to be output M8114 3 3 D 8115 to D 8119 Not used RS FNC 80 and Computer Link ch1 Refer to Data Communication Edition for details D 8120 3 RS FNC 80 instruction and computer link ch1 Communication format setting 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 8121 3 Computer link ch1 Station ...

Страница 848: ...able counter 3 3 M8138 D 8139 HSCS FNC 53 HSCR FNC 54 HSZ FNC 55 and HSCT FNC280 instructions Number of instructions being executed 3 3 M8139 D 8140 Lower Accumulated number of pulses output to Y000 for PLSY FNC 57 and PLSR FNC 59 instructions or current address of Y000 for positioning instruction 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 8141 Upper D 8142 Lower Accumulated number of pulses output to Y001 for PLSY FNC 57...

Страница 849: ...efault 1 3 3 M8154 Response waiting time of EXTR FNC180 instruction 3 3 3 3 D 8155 1 Response wait time of inverter communication ch2 3 4 3 3 D 8155 Step number during communication of EXTR FNC180 instruction M8155 3 3 3 3 D 8156 Step number of instruction during inverter communication ch2 Default 1 3 4 3 3 M8156 Error code for EXTR FNC180 instruction M8156 3 3 3 3 D 8157 2 Error code for inverter...

Страница 850: ... Network setting Refer to Data Communication Edition for details D 8170 Not used D 8171 D 8172 D 8173 Station number 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 3 D 8174 Total number of slave stations 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 3 D 8175 Refresh range 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 3 D 8176 Station number setting 3 3 3 M8038 3 3 3 6 3 3 D 8177 Total slave station number setting 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 3 D 8178 Refresh range setting 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 3 D 8179 Re...

Страница 851: ...8203 1 Number of communication error at master station 3 3 3 M8183 to M8191 D203 3 3 2 3 3 D 8204 1 Number of communication error at slave station No 1 3 3 3 D204 3 3 2 3 3 D 8205 1 Number of communication error at slave station No 2 3 3 3 D205 3 3 2 3 3 D 8206 1 Number of communication error at slave station No 3 3 3 3 D206 3 3 2 3 3 D 8207 1 Number of communication error at slave station No 4 3 ...

Страница 852: ...ansion board connected to the BD connector of a 14 point or 24 point type main unit or the BD1 connector of a 40 point or 60 point type main unit 4 Expansion board connected to the BD2 connector of a 40 point or 60 point type main unit 5 Only a 40 point or 60 point type FX3G PLC can be connected 6 Available in Ver 1 10 or later Display Module Function FX3G 5DM FX3U 7DM Refer to Hardware Edition Ma...

Страница 853: ...Y FNC186 instruction Scan counting for timing clock output 1 3 3 3 D 8331 DUTY FNC186 instruction Scan counting for timing clock output 2 3 3 3 D 8332 DUTY FNC186 instruction Scan counting for timing clock output 3 3 3 3 D 8333 DUTY FNC186 instruction Scan counting for timing clock output 4 3 3 3 D 8334 DUTY FNC186 instruction Scan counting for timing clock output 5 3 3 3 D 8336 DVIT FNC151 instru...

Страница 854: ... speed Default 50000 3 2 D 8377 Upper D 8378 Y003 Acceleration time Default 100 3 2 D 8379 Y003 Deceleration time Default 100 3 2 D 8380 to D 8392 Not used RS2 FNC 87 ch0 FX3G PLCs Refer to Data Communication Edition for details D 8370 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 Communication format setting 3 D 8371 Not used D 8372 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 Remaining points of transmit data 3 D 8373 1 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 Monitoring receive...

Страница 855: ...ms ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after M8398 turns ON RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Refer to Data Communication Edition for details D 8400 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Communication format setting 3 3 3 D 8401 Not used D 8402 5 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Remaining points of transmit data 3 3 3 M8402 D 8403 5 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Monitoring receive data points 3 3 3 M8403 D 8404 Not used D 8405 Communication parameter display ch1 3 3 3 ...

Страница 856: ...3 3 D 8432 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Terminator 1 and 2 Default ETX 3 3 3 D 8433 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Terminator 3 and 4 3 3 3 D 8434 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Receive sum received data 3 3 3 D 8435 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Receive sum calculated result 3 3 3 D 8436 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send sum 3 3 3 D 8437 Not used 1 Cleared when the PLC switches from RUN to STOP FX3U CF ADP ch1 Refer to CF ADP Manual for details D 8400 to D 8401 Not used...

Страница 857: ...a register refer to the CF ADP Manual Error Detection Refer to Chapter 38 for details D 8438 4 Error code for serial communication error 2 ch2 3 3 3 M8438 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 Refer to Data Communication Edition for details D 8439 Operation mode display ch2 3 3 3 Error Detection Refer to Chapter 38 for details D 8440 to D 8448 Not used D 8449 Special block error code 3 3 3 5 M8449 ...

Страница 858: ...ned to ON or OFF respectively during the 1st scan of the PLC program It can be utilized as an initial setting signal in a program for initializing the program for writing a specified value or for another purpose 1 Example program M8003 turns OFF momentarily for only 1 scan time when the PLC enters the RUN mode 2 Flag operation timing M8000 RUN monitor NO contact Always ON while the PLC is in RUN m...

Страница 859: ...y buffer memories are transferred it extends the scan time and a watchdog timer error may occur 3 When using many high speed counters software counters When many high speed counters are programmed and high frequency is counted at the same time it extends the scan time and a watchdog timer error may occur 3 How to reset the watchdog timer The watchdog timer can be reset in the middle of a sequence ...

Страница 860: ... time for the constant scan time 37 2 6 Internal clock M8011 to M8014 The PLC has the following four types of internal clocks which are always oscillating while the PLC power is ON Supply voltage Allowable momentary power failure time 100V AC system 10 ms 200V AC system Setting range 10 to 100 ms Set a value to D8008 Default 10 ms 1 scan time Power failure detection time D8008 10ms Approx 5 ms AC ...

Страница 861: ...10DU E 20DU E 25DU E use the two digit year mode If the four digit year mode is selected the year data will not be displayed correctly Note that the clock is changed to the 2 digit year mode when the clock is set from the FX 10DU E 20DU E 25DU E while the PLC is operating in the 4 digit year mode Number Name Operation and function M8015 Clock stop and preset When M8015 turns ON the real time clock...

Страница 862: ...hange the flickering value by pressing the or key and press the OK key to set the value The items are set in the order year month day hour minute second When the last second value is decided by pressing the OK key the message Current time is set appears and setting of the present time is completed 5 Press the OK or ESC key to return to selection screen 6 Press the ESC key to return to the MENU scr...

Страница 863: ...ter value change function in the device monitor of the programming tool input the date and time several minutes ahead to each data register 3 Finishing the time change When the actual time reaches the input data reset M8015 by forced ON OFF Point a While M8015 is OFF the registers for date and time cannot be changed Make sure to set M8015 to ON and then input date and time b When inputting the tim...

Страница 864: ...5 μs or when receiving pulses whose response frequency is 50 k to 100 kHz using high speed counters perform the following actions Input wiring length should be 5 m 16 4 or less Connect a bleeder resistor 1 5 kΩ 1 2 W to the input terminal The load current of the open collector transistor output in the device on the other end should be 20 mA or more including the input current of the PLC 2 In the F...

Страница 865: ...The latch battery backed devices such as auxiliary relays and data registers are not used for control 3 The sampling trace function is not used 4 The real time clock function is not used only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs 3 Example program for batteryless mode When a parameter setting for batteryless mode is not available create the sequence program shown below Example program for clearing the memory backup ...

Страница 866: ...he heater and other equipment are kept driven and then the PLC can be started again after program changes Device number Cleared devices M8031 1 non latch memory all clear Contact image of output relay Y general type auxiliary relay M and general type state relay S Contact and coil of timer T Contact counting coil and reset coil of general type counter C Present value of general type data register ...

Страница 867: ... diagram example above Make the external RUN STOP input valid by specifying an input between X000 and X017 1 for the RUN input signal 1 X000 to X007 in the FX3U 16M FX3UC 16M and 14 point type FX3G PLCs and X000 to X014 in 24 point type FX3G PLCs a Display the parameter setting in the programming tool In GX Developer double click Parameter PC parameter in the project tree to display the dialog box...

Страница 868: ...ial data register D8039 the scan time in the PLC does not become shorter than the value stored in D8039 The PLC pauses for the remaining time when the operation ends earlier and then returns to step 0 1 Example program 2 Cautions 1 When using an instruction executed in synchronization with a scan a When using an instruction executed in synchronization with a scan such as RAMP FNC 67 HKY FNC 71 SEG...

Страница 869: ...rohibited devices For details refer to the Analog Control Edition 1 Special auxiliary relay M8260 to M8279 FX3G PLC 1 Only a 40 point or 60 point type FX3G PLC can be connected Number Operation and function FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD Applicable version Ver 1 10 or later Ver 1 10 or later 1st analog expansion board M 8260 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching M 8261 Input mode switching Ch2 N...

Страница 870: ...ut data Ch2 Not used D 8262 Not used Not used D 8263 Not used Not used D 8264 Number of averaging times for Ch1 1 to 4095 Not used D 8265 Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 Not used D 8266 Not used Not used D 8267 Not used Not used D 8268 Error status Error status D 8269 Model code K3 Model code K4 2nd analog expansion board 1 D 8270 Input data Ch1 Output data D 8271 Input data Ch2 Not us...

Страница 871: ... Input mode switching Ch1 M 8271 Input mode switching Ch2 Output mode switching Ch2 Input mode switching Ch2 M 8272 Input mode switching Ch3 Output mode switching Ch3 Output mode switching M 8273 Input mode switching Ch4 Output mode switching Ch4 Not used M 8274 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch1 Not used M 8275 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch2 Not used M 8276 Not used Output hold mode cance...

Страница 872: ...K J switching Input sensor selection M 8272 Not used Not used Not used M 8273 Not used Not used Not used M 8274 Not used Not used Not used M 8275 Not used Not used Not used M 8276 Not used Not used Not used M 8277 Not used Not used Not used M 8278 Not used Not used Not used M 8279 Not used Not used Not used 3rd analog special adapter M 8280 Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection Tem...

Страница 873: ...h1 Input mode switching Ch1 M 8291 Input mode switching Ch2 Output mode switching Ch2 Input mode switching Ch2 M 8292 Input mode switching Ch3 Output mode switching Ch3 Output mode switching M 8293 Input mode switching Ch4 Output mode switching Ch4 Not used M 8294 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch1 Not used M 8295 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch2 Not used M 8296 Not used Output hold mode can...

Страница 874: ...mber of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 Not used Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 D 8276 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 Not used Not used D 8277 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 Not used Not used D 8278 Error status Error status Error status D 8279 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K50 3rd analog special adapter D 8280 Input data Ch1 Output data Ch1 Input ...

Страница 875: ...5 Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 D 8276 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 D 8277 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 D 8278 Error status Error status...

Страница 876: ... for Ch2 1 to 4095 Not used Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 D 8286 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 Not used Not used D 8287 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 Not used Not used D 8288 Error status Error status Error status D 8289 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K50 2nd analog special adapter 1 D 8290 Input data Ch1 Output data Ch1 Input data Ch1 D 8291 Input...

Страница 877: ... Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 D 8286 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 D 8287 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 D 8288 Error status Error status ...

Страница 878: ...age or current is incorrectly supplied to the power terminal The wiring is incorrect There is fault inside the PLC Check the power supply voltage Disconnect cables except the power cable turn the PLC power ON again and verify that the status is changed If the status is not improved consult a Mitsubishi Electric representative Unlit One of the following has occurred The power is OFF The voltage is ...

Страница 879: ...mer error occurred Take one of the following actions Review the program and make sure that the maximum value D8012 of the scan time is not larger than the set value D8000 of the watchdog timer Make sure that an input used for input interrupt or pulse catch does not abnormally turn ON and OFF several times in one scan time Make sure that the frequency of the pulse duty 50 input to a high speed coun...

Страница 880: ...he network Make sure that the connected remote I O units and remote device stations are consistent with the detailed information on remote stations Flickering All stations are abnormal Securely connect the built in master to remote I O units and remote device stations on the network Make sure that the connected remote I O units and remote device stations are consistent with the detailed informatio...

Страница 881: ...d return to Top screen 3 If two or more errors occur press or key to changeover the page Displayed contents 4 Press ESC key to cancel the operation and return to menu screen Operation key Contents of operation ESC Return to TOP screen Moves the cursor up Moves the cursor at high speed when pressed for 1 second or more When the cursor is located at the top key operation is invalid Moves the cursor ...

Страница 882: ...by GX Developer 1 Connect a personal computer to PLC 2 Execute PLC diagnostics Click Diagnostics PLC diagnostics on the tool menu and execute the PLC diagnostics 3 Check the diagnostics result The error check result displays in the following windows The LED status of FX PCL is displayed Example one error occurs The error in PLC is displayed Open the help window of GX Developer to check the error d...

Страница 883: ...r PLC PP Communication Error Serial communication error 1 ch1 Link Error Serial communication error 2 ch2 Serial Communication Error 2 ch2 Parameter error Parameter Error Syntax error Syntax Error Circuit error Ladder Error Operation error Operation Error Special block error Special Block Error This manual GX Developer SW D5C GPPW E Ver 8 95Z SW D5C GPPW J Ver 8 95Z I O configuration error I O con...

Страница 884: ...8069 ON PLC executes I O bus check If an error is found error code 6103 or 6104 is stored to D8061 and M8061 turns ON When error code 6104 is stored M8009 turns ON and the PLC stores the I O numbers following the extension power supply module or the powered extension unit with DC 24V output failure to D8009 3 If the unit or block corresponding to a programmed I O number is not actually loaded M806...

Страница 885: ...s changed STOP When program is transferred STOP M8065 Syntax error Flickering STOP M8066 Circuit error Flickering STOP M8067 Operation error Unlit RUN RUN mode M8068 Operation error latch Unlit RUN M8109 I O refresh error Unlit RUN Always M8316 Unconnected I O designation error Unlit RUN RUN mode M8318 BFM initialization failure Unlit RUN Check M8449 Special block error Unlit RUN Always D8166 Spec...

Страница 886: ... of the AT commands Wiring Check the communication cables for correct wiring 3802 Communication character error 3803 Communication data sum check error 3804 Communication data format error 3805 Command error 3806 Communication time out detected 3807 Modem initialization error 3808 N N network parameter error 3812 Parallel link character error 3813 Parallel link sum error 3814 Parallel link format ...

Страница 887: ...t be written to the attached flash memory cassette Verify that the memory cassette is installed correctly 6113 Changed settings for the built in CC Link LT special function block cannot be written to the attached write protected flash memory cassette Set the protect switch to OFF 6114 CC Link LT settings cannot be written to the built in CC Link LT special function block Set the configuration agai...

Страница 888: ...PLC and correctly set the parameters 6402 Memory capacity setting error 6403 Latched device area setting error 6404 Comment area setting error 6405 File register area setting error 6406 Special unit BFM initial value setting positioning instruction setting sum check error 6407 Special unit BFM initial value setting positioning instruction setting error 6409 Other setting error 6411 Built in CC Lin...

Страница 889: ... times or more 6614 No MPS instruction 6615 No MPP instruction 6616 No coil between MPS MRD and MPP or incorrect combination 6617 Instruction below is not connected to bus line STL RET MCR P I DI EI FOR NEXT SRET IRET FEND or END 6618 STL MC or MCR can only be used in main program but it is used elsewhere e g in interrupt routine or subroutine 6619 Invalid instruction is used in FOR NEXT loop STL ...

Страница 890: ... connected 6709 Other e g improper branching This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the program and check the contents of the operands used in applied instructions Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation error may still occur For example T500Z itself is not an error But if Z had a value of 100 the timer T600 would be attempted to be accessed This would cause an...

Страница 891: ...hanging the setting execute auto tuning again 6753 Limit cycle method Abnormal output set value for auto tuning ULV upper limit LLV lower limit Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not started Verify that the target setting contents are correct 6754 Limit cycle method Abnormal PV threshold hysteresis set value for auto tuning SHPV 0 6755 Limit cycle method Abnormal auto tuning transfe...

Страница 892: ...y cassette is not connected Check for the correct attachment of the memory cassette 6772 Memory cassette is protected against writing The write protect switch of the memory cassette was set to ON when data was transferred to the flash memory Set the protect switch to OFF 6773 Access error to memory cassette during writing in RUN mode While data was written in the RUN mode data was transferred to r...

Страница 893: ...ng tool 1 GX Works2 GX Works2 Japanese version SW DNC GXW2 J is applicable to FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLCs from the following versions a FX3G PLCs b FX3U PLCs c FX3UC PLCs FX3G PLC version Model name Media model name is shown below Applicable GX Works2 version Remarks Before Ver 1 40 GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 J Ver 1 07H or later Model selection FX3G Ver 1 40 Ver 1 56J or later FX3U PLC version Model name Med...

Страница 894: ...l selection FX3U FX3UC Before Ver 3 00 Ver 1 48A or later Ver 3 00 Ver 1 62Q or later FX3UC PLC version Model name Media model name is shown below Applicable GX Works2 version Remarks Before Ver 2 70 GX Works2 SW DNC GXW2 E Ver 1 08J or later Model selection FX3U FX3UC Before Ver 3 00 Ver 1 48A or later Ver 3 00 Ver 1 62Q or later FX3G PLC version Model name Media model name is shown below Applica...

Страница 895: ...ore Ver 1 10 GX Developer SW D5C GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later Model selection FX3G Ver 1 10 Ver 8 78G or later FX3U PLC version Model name Media model name is shown below Applicable GX Developer version Remarks Before Ver 2 30 GX Developer SW D5C GPPW E Ver 8 24A or later Model selection FX3U C 1 Before Ver 2 41 Ver 8 29F or later Model selection FX3U C Before Ver 2 61 Ver 8 29F or later 2 Ver 2 61 V...

Страница 896: ...rted interfaces Standard built in port or expansion board FX3U 422 BD for RS 422 When the RS 232C RS 422 converter FX 232AWC H or USB RS 422 converter FX USB AW is connected Expansion board FX3U 232 BD for RS 232C Special adapter FX3U 232ADP MB for RS 232C Expansion board FX3U USB BD for USB c In programming tools not supporting 115 2 kbps Communication is executed at 9 600 or 19 200 bps In FX3G P...

Страница 897: ...iting in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX2N PLCs Ver 1 00 Ver 5 00A or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX1N PLCs Ver 1 00 Ver 8 72A or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs earlier than Ver 1 10 Ver 8 76E or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is ...

Страница 898: ... Ver 1 00 Ver 8 72A or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs earlier than Ver 1 10 Ver 8 78G or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs Ver 1 10 FX3U FX3UC Ver 7 00A or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX2N PLCs Ver 3 00 Ver 8 18U or later Writing in the in...

Страница 899: ... except final circuit GX Works2 Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer Ver 8 24A or later For FX3U FX3UC PLCs Ver 2 20 or later 256 steps or less after edit addition deletion including NOP immediately after circuit blocks except final circuit For FX3UC PLCs earlier than Ver 2 20 127 steps or less after edit addition deletion including NOP immediately after circuit blocks except final circuit GX Developer...

Страница 900: ... once and then set it to OFF to execute the instruction for falling edge pulse Instruction for rising edge pulse When writing is completed during RUN for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse the instruction for rising edge pulse is executed if a target device of the instruction for rising edge pulse or the operation condition device is ON Target instructions for rising edge pul...

Страница 901: ...reading writing etc in the FX3G PLC using the built in USB programming port and GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later For GX Developer prior to Ver 8 72A communication using the built in USB programming port is not available 1 Installation of USB driver GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later It is necessary to install the USB driver to execute USB communication using the built in USB programming port For the U...

Страница 902: ...k Serial in PC side I F to open PC side I F Serial setting dialog box 3 Select USB GOT Transparent mode 4 Click OK button to finish the setting GX Developer Ver 8 21X or former GX Developer Ver8 22Y or later When using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series Not supported not available Setting shown below is required When using transparent function by way of RS 232 in GOT1000 Series S...

Страница 903: ...tc cannot be normally executed 1 GX Developer Ver 8 18U or later supports the FX3UC Series 2 GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later supports the FX3G Series Setting in GX Developer Ver 8 18U or later Ver 8 72A or later in FX3G PLC 1 Select Online Transfer setup to open Transfer Setup dialog box 2 Double click PLC module in PLC side I F to open PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module dialog box 3 Put ...

Страница 904: ...tion for MELSEC FX is not available When using the list editor function for MELSEC FX upgrade the standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS to the version compatible with the FX3G PLC Check the applicability of other items in the GOT manual F940WGOT Not applicable The following restriction applies when connected Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only in the function rang...

Страница 905: ...ction applies when connected Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in the FX2N and FX2NC PLCs For applicable models refer to the GOT manual For connection using the 2 port interface function 1 refer to Appendix A 1 4 F940GOT F940 Handy GOT Not applicable F930GOT K Not applicable F920GOT K Not appli...

Страница 906: ...opted in products manufactured at the following time Main unit LOT indication adoption time FX3U Series PLC January 2009 and later FX3UC Series PLC January 2009 and later FX3G Series PLC October 2008 and later Right side Example nameplate manufacture s serial number 1010001 Year Example 2009 Last digit of year Year Example 2010 Last two digit of year 0 1 1 0 0 0 Control number Product from January...

Страница 907: ... IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 Supports connection of FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 2AD BD and FX3G 1DA BD Supports connection of display module FX3G 5DM Supports the floating point operation function Supports the inverter communication function Supports the pulse width pulse period measurement function Ver 1 20 96 June 2009 Supports connection of following analog special adapters FX3U 3A ADP Supports th...

Страница 908: ...d as Ver 2 20 or later in this manual Supports the following 28 instructions ZPUSH FNC102 ZPOP FNC103 WSUM FNC140 WTOB FNC141 BTOW FNC142 UNI FNC143 DIS FNC144 SORT2 FNC149 TBL FNC152 COMRD FNC182 DUTY FNC186 BK FNC192 BK FNC193 BKCMP FNC194 BKCMP FNC195 BKCMP FNC196 BKCMP FNC197 BKCMP FNC198 BKCMP FNC199 STR FNC200 VAL FNC201 INSTR FNC208 FDEL FNC210 FINS FNC211 DABIN FNC260 BINDA FNC261 RBFM FNC...

Страница 909: ...1 Ver 2 61 2 97 July 2009 Supports the following 6 instructions FLCRT FNC300 FLDEL FNC301 FLWR FNC302 FLRD FNC303 FLCMD FNC304 FLSTRD FNC305 Supports connection of the following special adapters FX3U 3A ADP FX3U CF ADP Supports the hardware error function of FX3U 4DA ADP Customer keyword permanent PLC lock is supported Ver 2 70 107 July 2010 FX3UC 16MR D T FX3UC 16MR DS T First product Supports th...

Страница 910: ... 32 bit instruction Contact instructions LD 0 065 0 129 μs in 2 step instruction 1 0 193 μs in 3 step instruction 3 LDI 0 065 0 129 μs in 2 step instruction 1 0 193 μs in 3 step instruction 3 LDP 7 8 LDF 7 8 AND 0 065 0 129 μs in 2 step instruction 1 0 193 μs in 3 step instruction 3 ANI 0 065 0 129 μs in 2 step instruction 1 0 193 μs in 3 step instruction 3 ANP 7 5 ANF 7 5 OR 0 065 0 129 μs in 2 s...

Страница 911: ... μs in execution in OFF status OUT C D 0 71 6 1 0 71 6 1 C235 to C255 9 5 μs in execution in ON status 9 0 μs in execution in OFF status SET Y M 0 065 0 129 μs in 2 step instruction 2 0 193 μs in 3 step instruction 3 SET S 4 7 or 6 6 0 9n 0 13 n Number of recombination 4 7 μs when there is no recombination RST Y M 0 065 0 129 μs in 2 step instruction 2 0 193 μs in 3 step instruction 3 RST S 4 6 0 ...

Страница 912: ...1 2 μs in 3 step instruction 3 ANI 0 2 1 16 μs in 2 step instruction 1 1 2 μs in 3 step instruction 3 ANP 2 36 2 32 3 step instruction 2 48 μs in execution in ON status 3 2 44 μs in execution in OFF status 3 ANF 2 4 2 36 3 step instruction 2 48 μs in execution in ON status 3 2 44 μs in execution in OFF status 3 OR 0 21 1 28 μs in 2 step instruction 1 1 32 μs in 3 step instruction 3 ORI 0 21 1 28 μ...

Страница 913: ...n execution in OFF status OUT C D 2 26 2 49 1 93 2 35 C235 to C255 2 21 μs in execution in ON status 1 06 μs in execution in OFF status SET Y M 0 23 0 72 μs in 2 step instruction 2 0 72 μs in 3 step instruction 3 SET S 1 23 or 1 33 0 51n 0 59 n Number of recombination 1 23 μs when there is no recombination RST Y M 0 23 0 72 μs in 2 step instruction 2 0 72 μs in 3 step instruction 3 RST S 1 17 0 59...

Страница 914: ...1 52 μs in 3 step instruction 3 ANI 0 41 1 48 μs in 2 step instruction 1 1 52 μs in 3 step instruction 3 ANP 2 72 2 68 3 step instruction 2 8 μs in execution in ON status 3 2 76 μs in execution in OFF status 3 ANF 2 76 2 72 3 step instruction 2 8 μs in execution in ON status 3 2 76 μs in execution in OFF status 3 OR 0 42 1 6 μs in 2 step instruction 1 1 6 μs in 3 step instruction 3 ORI 0 42 1 6 μs...

Страница 915: ... in execution in OFF status OUT C D 3 04 3 25 2 72 3 1 C235 to C255 3 00 μs in execution in ON status 1 45 μs in execution in OFF status SET Y M 0 44 0 88 μs in 2 step instruction 2 0 88 μs in 3 step instruction 3 SET S 1 62 or 1 66 0 55n 0 78 n Number of recombination n 1 62 when there is no recombination RST Y M 0 44 0 88 μs in 2 step instruction 2 0 88 μs in 3 step instruction 3 RST S 1 55 0 78...

Страница 916: ...ution time in ON status μs Execution time in OFF status μs 16 bit instruc tion 32 bit instruc tion 16 bit instruc tion 32 bit instruc tion 16 bit instruc tion 32 bit instruc tion 16 bit instruc tion 32 bit instruc tion STL 1 8 0 49n 2 18 0 49n n Number of recombination n 0 When there is no recombination RET 1 05 1 05 Instruction Execution time in ON status μs Execution time in OFF status μs Remark...

Страница 917: ... of only END is required X Number of input points Y Number of output points 07 WDT 5 4 0 065 08 FOR 11 6 FOR NEXT 09 NEXT Move and compare 10 CMP 15 5 16 0 0 455 0 845 11 ZCP 18 9 19 7 0 585 1 105 12 MOV 0 64 1 48 0 32 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 13 SMOV 22 9 0 715 14 CML 10 6 10 2 0 325 0 585 15 BMOV 13 9 0 44n 0 455 16 FMOV 14 2 0 19n 14 0 0 38n 0 455 0 845 17 XCH 10 7 11 4 0 325 0 ...

Страница 918: ... REF 4 5 1 39n 0 325 51 REFF 14 4 0 24n 0 195 52 MTR 5 9 5 5 53 HSCS 20 0 0 845 54 HSCR 20 0 0 845 55 HSZ 22 0 1 105 56 SPD 16 0 16 0 12 6 12 6 57 PLSY 20 0 13 6 6 9 6 9 58 PWM 10 6 6 2 59 PLSR 11 2 11 2 7 0 7 0 Handy instructions 60 IST 28 5 0 455 61 SER 16 4 1 4n 18 5 2 13n 0 585 1 105 62 ABSD 19 0 85n 20 0 1 23n 0 585 1 105 63 INCD 23 7 6 5 64 TTMR 10 4 9 2 65 STMR 19 0 21 0 66 ALT 11 6 0 2 67 ...

Страница 919: ...or the FX0N FX2N FX2NC Series or in the CC Link LT built in the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 2 When the instruction is executed to BFM 32 or later in a special function block unit for the FX0N FX2N FX2NC Series or in the CC Link LT built in the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 3 When the instruction is executed to a BFM in a special function block unit for the FX3U FX3UC Series External FX device 80 RS 15 6 5 7 81 PRUN 17 1 1 ...

Страница 920: ...7 SWAP 7 7 8 0 0 195 0 325 148 149 SORT2 13 2 15 2 6 5 7 7 Positioning control 150 DSZR 170 0 7 0 151 DVIT 178 0 178 0 7 1 7 1 152 TBL 1 7 1 153 154 155 ABS 25 4 22 2 156 ZRN 58 0 62 0 7 1 7 1 157 PLSV 144 0 144 0 7 1 7 1 158 DRVI 178 0 178 0 7 1 7 1 159 DRVA 178 0 178 0 7 1 7 1 1 The instruction execution time is as shown below depending on the executed positioning type instruction FNC No Instruc...

Страница 921: ...2DA Extension function 180 Other instructions 181 182 COMRD 33 7 0 325 183 184 RND 8 5 0 195 185 186 DUTY 6 0 6 0 187 188 CRC 12 6 0 82n 0 455 189 HCMOV 14 8 0 845 Block data operation 190 191 192 BK 13 1 0 66n 13 9 1 23n 0 585 1 105 193 BK 13 1 0 66n 13 9 1 23n 0 585 1 105 194 BKCMP 19 6 1 88n 20 3 2 26n 0 585 1 105 195 BKCMP 19 6 1 88n 20 3 2 26n 0 585 1 105 196 BKCMP 19 6 1 88n 20 3 2 26n 0 585...

Страница 922: ...alue of table position of deleted data n 3 m Number of data tables Table position of data insertion Number of data tables Present value of table position data insertion n Data comparison 220 221 222 223 224 LD 1 22 1 48 1 22 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 225 LD 1 22 1 48 1 22 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 226 LD 1 22 1 48 1 22 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 227 228 ...

Страница 923: ... 242 OR 1 22 1 48 1 22 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 243 244 OR 1 22 1 48 1 22 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 245 OR 1 22 1 48 1 22 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 246 OR 1 22 1 48 1 22 1 48 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 247 248 249 Data table processing 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 LIMIT 8 1 8 6 0 585 1 105 257 BAND 8 1 8 6 0 585 1 105 258 ZONE 7 9 8 5 0 585 1 1...

Страница 924: ...xecuted to a BFM in a special function block unit for the FX3U FX3UC Series High speed processing 2 280 HSCT 30 0 1 365 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 Extension file register control 290 LOADR 13 2 0 44n 0 325 291 SAVER 166n 6 4 292 INITR 17600n 0 325 293 LOGR 244 17 9n 0 715 294 RWER 46700n 0 325 n Number of write target sectors 295 INITER 17300n 0 325 296 to 299 FX3U CF ADP 300 FLCRT 83 2 6...

Страница 925: ...16 0 8 08 FOR 4 98 FOR NEXT 5 76 FOR NEXT 09 NEXT Move and compare 10 CMP 11 18 11 54 0 61 0 61 12 91 13 66 0 8 0 8 11 ZCP 12 51 13 15 0 61 0 61 14 62 16 02 0 8 0 8 12 MOV 0 52 0 61 0 38 0 41 1 29 1 56 0 61 0 65 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 13 SMOV 16 19 0 61 18 68 0 8 14 CML 6 68 7 15 0 61 0 61 8 03 8 5 0 8 0 8 15 BMOV 15 08 5 58n 0 61 17 54 5 58n 0 8 16 FMOV 10 20 0 77n 10 87 0 79n 0 61 0...

Страница 926: ...04 86n 0 61 0 61 117 29 454 74n 121 98 905 03n 0 8 0 8 n Number of transfer points FROM 2 114 98 968 02n 119 62 1931 4n 0 61 0 61 117 81 968 19n 123 62 1931 4n 0 8 0 8 n Number of transfer points FROM 3 52 58 131 43n 11 67 242 33n 0 61 0 61 55 58 131 43n 14 67 242 34n 0 8 0 8 n Number of transfer points 79 TO 1 74 84 515 17n 78 31 1025 7n 0 61 0 61 76 67 515 34n 82 39 1025 7n 0 8 0 8 n Number of t...

Страница 927: ...7 TWR 337 1 0 61 339 6 0 8 169 HOUR 10 86 11 57 10 44 10 44 12 59 13 69 12 17 13 01 External device 170 GRY 11 46 11 81 0 61 0 61 12 62 13 35 0 8 0 8 171 GBIN 11 46 11 83 0 61 0 61 12 62 13 37 0 8 0 8 176 RD3A 2AD 1939 0 61 1941 0 8 FX2N 2AD 177 WR3A 2DA 3086 0 61 3089 0 8 FX2N 2DA Data comparison 224 LD 1 56 1 8 1 52 1 76 2 28 2 72 2 24 2 68 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 225 LD 1 92 2 36 1 ...

Страница 928: ... 28 2 6 3 2 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 244 OR 1 52 1 72 1 56 1 76 2 24 2 64 2 28 2 68 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 245 OR 1 84 2 2 1 92 2 32 2 56 3 16 2 64 3 24 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 246 OR 1 84 2 2 1 96 2 36 2 56 3 16 2 68 3 28 For details refer to Appendix B 6 2 External device communication inverter communication 270 IVCK 32 60 4 46 33 90 4 88 271 IVDR 31 60 4 46 3...

Страница 929: ...atus 5 03 μs Non execution time Execution time in OFF status 0 75 μs ADD instruction FNC 20 Execution time at rising edge of input Execution time in ON status 6 37 μs Non execution time Execution time in OFF status 0 75 μs SUB instruction FNC 21 Execution time at rising edge of input Execution time in ON status 6 47 μs Non execution time Execution time in OFF status 0 75 μs MUL instruction FNC 22 ...

Страница 930: ...s 0 81 μs MUL instruction FNC 22 Execution time at rising edge of input Execution time in ON status 7 24 μs Non execution time Execution time in OFF status 0 81 μs DIV instruction FNC 23 Execution time at rising edge of input Execution time in ON status 7 44 μs Non execution time Execution time in OFF status 0 81 μs INC instruction FNC 24 Execution time at rising edge of input Execution time in ON...

Страница 931: ...combinations are handled as exceptions because high speed processing is adopted in the technique 2 When the instruction is executed for a BFM in a special function block unit for FX3U FX3UC Series DMOV instruction 32 bit instruction 1 These combinations are handled as exceptions because high speed processing is adopted in the technique 2 When the instruction is executed for a BFM in a special func...

Страница 932: ...1 T C D R KnY KnM KnS 1 T C D R ON KnX KnY KnM KnS 0 64 0 72 14 68 8 28 1 56 1 8 16 42 9 92 T C D R 0 88 0 84 13 08 6 68 1 84 1 96 14 82 8 32 K H 0 48 0 52 12 28 5 78 1 24 1 4 13 22 7 22 OFF KnX KnY KnM KnS 0 36 0 58 0 52 0 82 T C D R K H Command contact S source D destination Standard mode Extension mode Without indexing μs With indexing μs Without indexing μs With indexing μs KnY KnM KnS 1 T C D...

Страница 933: ...instruction 32 bit operation 1 When K8 is specified and the head bit device number is a multiple of 8 K8M0 K8M8 S source D destination Standard mode Extension mode Without indexing μs With indexing μs Without indexing μs With indexing μs KnY KnM KnS T C D R KnY KnM KnS T C D R KnY KnM KnS T C D R KnY KnM KnS T C D R KnX KnY KnM KnS 1 2 12 2 2 11 28 9 18 3 3 12 13 12 10 7 T C D R 2 24 2 36 9 78 7 5...

Страница 934: ...CML FNC 14 Complement 253 BMOV FNC 15 Block Move 255 FMOV FNC 16 Fill Move 259 PRUN FNC 81 Parallel Run Octal Mode 459 XCH FNC 17 Exchange 261 SWAP FNC147 Byte Swap 543 EMOV FNC112 Floating Point Move 491 HCMOV FNC189 High Speed Counter Move 597 2 Data conversion instructions Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page BCD FNC 18 Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal 263 BIN FNC 19 Conversion to Binary 266 GRY...

Страница 935: ...on instructions Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 6 Special function instructions Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page SQR FNC 48 Square Root 335 ESQR FNC127 Floating Point Square Root 516 EXP FNC124 Floating Point Exponent 510 LOGE FNC125 Floating Point Natural Logarithm 512 LOG10 FNC126 Floating Point Common Logarithm 514 SIN FNC130 Floating Poi...

Страница 936: ...ntrol instructions Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page CJ FNC 00 Conditional Jump 220 CALL FNC 01 Call Subroutine 227 SRET FNC 02 Subroutine Return 231 IRET FNC 03 Interrupt Return 232 EI FNC 04 Enable Interrupt 234 9 Data operation instructions Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page DI FNC 05 Disable Interrupt 235 FEND FNC 06 Main Routine Program End 236 FOR FNC 08 Start a FOR NEXT Loop 240 NEXT FNC 09 ...

Страница 937: ...F card format 743 FLWR FNC302 Data write 745 FLRD FNC303 Data read 748 FLCMD FNC304 FX3U CF ADP command 750 FLSTRD FNC305 FX3U CF ADP status read 752 19 Other handy instructions Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page WDT FNC 07 Watchdog Timer Refresh 238 ALT FNC 66 Alternate State 411 ANS FNC 46 Timed Annunciator Set 332 ANR FNC 47 Annunciator Reset 334 HOUR FNC169 Hour Meter 579 RAMP FNC 67 Ramp Varia...

Страница 938: ...FNC 15 Block Move 255 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 BON FNC 44 Check Specified Bit Status 328 BTOW FNC142 BYTE to WORD 537 C CALL FNC 01 Call Subroutine 227 CCD FNC 84 Check Code 467 CJ FNC 00 Conditional Jump 220 CML FNC 14 Complement 253 CMP FNC 10 Compare 244 COMRD FNC182 Read Device Comment Data 588 COS FNC131 Floating Point Cosine 521 CRC FNC188 Cycli...

Страница 939: ...encer 405 INITER FNC295 Initialize ER 737 INITR FNC292 Initialize R and ER 724 INSTR FNC208 Character string search 638 INT FNC129 Floating Point to Integer Conversion 518 IRET FNC 03 Interrupt Return 232 IST FNC 60 Initial State 389 IVBWR FNC274 Inverter Parameter Block Write 695 IVCK FNC270 Inverter Status Check 687 IVDR FNC271 Inverter Drive 689 IVMC FNC275 Inverter Multi Command 697 IVRD FNC27...

Страница 940: ... FNC 35 Bit Shift Left 304 SFTR FNC 34 Bit Shift Right 302 SFWR FNC 38 Shift Write FIFO FILO Control 311 SIN FNC130 Floating Point Sine 520 SMOV FNC 13 Shift Move 251 SORT FNC 69 Sort Tabulated Data 418 SORT2 FNC149 Sort Tabulated Data 2 544 SPD FNC 56 Speed Detection 371 SQR FNC 48 Square Root 335 SRET FNC 02 Subroutine Return 231 Mnemonic FNC No Function Ref Page STMR FNC 65 Special Timer 409 ST...

Страница 941: ...els The table below shows discontinued models of MELSEC F Series PLCs and programming tools described in this manual Discontinued model Production stop date Repair acceptance period FX 10P E June 30 2008 Until June 30 2015 FX 20DU June 30 2008 Until June 30 2015 FX 232AW September 30 2004 Until September 30 2011 FX 232AWC June 30 2004 Until June 30 2011 FX 25DU E September 30 2002 Until September ...

Страница 942: ...940 FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual Basic Applied Instruction Edition D Discontinued models MEMO ...

Страница 943: ...i h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply includin...

Страница 944: ...ection 2 6 5 Caution on using header and terminator in RS2 instruction is added Section 16 6 Note on setting the clock data from the FX 10DU E 20DU E 25DU E is added Section 21 8 and Subsection 36 2 7 FX3U transistor output compatibility change the illegible from FX3UC to FX3U Section 13 3 Item 13 3 1 Section 13 8 Section 13 9 Section 13 10 Section 15 2 Section 15 3 Section 15 5 Revision A Revisio...

Страница 945: ...Supports connection of display module FX3G 5DM Chapter 2 Chapter 36 and Chapter 37 Supports the floating point operation function Chapter 12 and Chapter 18 Supports the inverter communication function Chapter 30 Supports the pulse width pulse period measurement function Section 35 8 Instruction Execution Time was added FX3G 6 2009 F 6 instructions are added FLCRT FNC300 FLDEL FNC301 FLWR FNC302 FL...

Страница 946: ...rsion 1 40 1 instruction added IVMC FNC275 Section 30 6 Supported in FX3U and FX3UC series version 3 00 Supports storage of symbolic information Support of the setting Read protect the execution program for block passwords Special block error condition D8166 is added Supports connection of FX3U FLROM 1M Errors are corrected Date Created Revision Description ...

Страница 947: ......

Страница 948: ... JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS 840 CHIYODA CHO HIMEJI JAPAN JY997D16601J MEE Effective July 2011 Specifications are subject to change without notice MODEL FX P3 E MODEL CODE 09R517 FX3G FX3U FX3UC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS PROGRAMMING MANUAL Basic Applied Instructions Edition ...

Результаты поиска

Содержание FX3G SERIES

Отзывы:

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды

Mitsubishi Electric FX3G SERIES, Руководство по программированию

Результаты поиска

Содержание FX3G SERIES

Отзывы:

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды